Home

ES3500 Series User's Guide - Server 2

1. OO 142 14 1 Bandwidih Control Po o E RR DU Va BEER eV ud aE RH Y Qoa iae S pps RUE 142 TE TOR Sd PR rinitis 142 proce Tende rius ASMA T PE 143 Chapter 15 a Rc Ee o een 145 15 1 Broadcast Storm Cono brille 145 Chapter 16 A A A MM MA MM MN MM M M MEME RA 147 TOU PENADO O oou eot Ea pinceau na A 147 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 17 IA HRS 149 17 1 nk Aggregation Overview o e Fab a uk Eae DX aa aaia 149 17 2 Dynamic Link AGE GAO stc 149 121 OESTE ID naa oia o cai Und 150 Wo Link PAO SUS datada 150 174 Cink Aggregata SS ai A A A AA 152 17 5 Link Aggregatian Control Protocol unn a id 154 17 6 Slate Trunking EXAMI us 155 Chapter 18 Port Authenl allOPY uauasaccuniaiik ek i42 AR MARRY ARXEKAA ER URNA R IA MULA DARE EU UAR AUAY UR NAK ARAM MER AN ERA MA 157 18 1 Port cU RES i rc ld ia 157 IS LLIEEE OS DE POTIONE csviciisnbeba orent Pene bebe Yee Pere Fe OC aep Erb ion beer uds 157 To b MAS Prat ied O ons amphi is abc ep i RF ec B ot a 158 18 4 Port Auhenicaton SOU atio cn ser rubia iaaa AE t 159 18 2 1 Activas IEEE BUB TR SECT a 160 e SL NS in D D rrerree Ter tree 161 18 2 9 Activate MAC Authentication srta dee 163 Chapter 19 o AAA 165 PRCT ARE POR SEGUY a M 165 19 2 PAR SAC SE wath as addet
2. NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC_TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by I CQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may not be possible by e mail ES3500 Series User s Guide EB Appendix A Common Services Table 149 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http
3. 37 3 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 37 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt
4. 320 Chapter 42 Cluster Management seinua is 321 42 1 Cluster Management Status Overview sssssssssssssssssseseeneee nnne ennt nnns 321 122 Guster Management SIUS anal 322 42 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management esses 323 42 3 Clustering Management Configuration ssssssssseseeeessee tenerent nnn enne 325 Chapter 43 ip P O Y A Y 327 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents A MAC Table CVSIVIBW osos apros daa ph pn tn manasa ioe eae ase 327 A ME MERAC ESE er o aiii 328 Chapter 44 ARP Table 330 AA LM VERGE cui 330 UL I ere o eT 330 442 UME IA Tabla ROSIN alta 331 Chapter 45 rfe 332 ZEIT CONO MN 332 Chapter 46 bis c gi 335 46 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS inicia a cse i 335 AE wich AGeaess And Bol sn NE 337 25 2 SICA CONANT rr 339 Append A Common SernitES aa AE aae 341 Appendix B Legal INM Dread io 345 aW ti ET 348 j 351 ES3500 Series User s Guide 15 Table of Contents ES3500 Series User s Guide PART User s Guide Getting to Know Your Switch T
5. VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps using the screen below 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value IP 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 48 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example C Protocol Based VLAN NENNDP Active Vv Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP h Ethernet type C Others Hex VID 5 Priority 0 Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 1 2 3 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add Click Add 9 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are
6. Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Backup Configuration Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Load Factory Default Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot System Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 173 Load Factory Defaul
7. 6 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s port which is not in VLAN 102 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Switch Setup 9 802 10 Port Based Smart Isolation Active VLAN Type MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level Level6 Level5 Level4 Level3 Level2 Level1 Level wm Oe w Aa min 4 Apely J Care ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTI VE enter a descriptive name VALN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off JEFA ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Normal 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 5 Q al e C Fp
8. ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes Product Model This field displays the model number of the Switch ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the date Version created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor ES3500 24HP only Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently
9. ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 95 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking oA amp um C Port based QinQ Selective Qin Active Port Role Tunnel TPID Normal v 1 Normal v 8100 2 Normal v 8100 3 Normal v 8100 mal AO NATA A AMENA A a Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for
10. Table 145 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management Table 145 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes t
11. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming Rate traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 41 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these
12. Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU Protection select ARP as the reason enter 100 as the rate limit packets per second for the first entry port to apply the setting to all ports Then click Apply Errdisable CAT Pont 1 100 2 100 3 100 4 100 5 100 6 qu SEMEN m 7 100 8 100 9 100 10 100 11 100 12 100 12 100 3 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect select Active for cause ARP and inactive port as the mode Then click Apply a disable D Errdisable Cause Active Mode o inactive pot v v inactive port v BPDU a inacive port__ v IGMP O inactive port S 4 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery select Active and Timer Status for loopguard and ARP entries Also enter 180 180 seconds 3 minutes in the Interval field for both entries Then click Apply Errdisable Recovery g Errdisable Active Reason Timer Status Interval O loopguard 180 ARP 180 BPDU O 300 IGMP O 300 66 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 5 How to Set Up a Guest VLAN All ports on the Switch are in VLAN 1 by default Say you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on ports 1 to 8 Clients that connect to these ports should provide the correct user name and password in order to access the ports You want to assign clients that connect to ports 1 2 or 3 to a guest
13. You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic or even copper cable connectors To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly 4 Close the transceiver s latch latch styles vary ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 5 Connect the fiber optic cables to the transceiver Figure 15 Transceiver Installation Example Figure 16 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver 2 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary 3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 17 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables Figure 18 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example Figure 19 Transceiver Removal Example EN ES3500 Series User s Guide C
14. 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE access node identifier ES3500 circuit id Active O identifier string option spv x delimiter x Apply Cancel Click Port on the top of the screen 2 Select Trusted for ports 11 and 12 and then click Apply JT VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuitid Remote id Untrusted Y a is 1 Untrusted Y U 4 l 2 Untrusted I Untusted v 4 Untrusted v L 3 5 Untrusted Y t 6 Untrusted v 7 Untrusted Y E l z 9 13 Untrusted v 14 Lintristod w Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen 19 Intermediate Agent ng Port PPPoE Active Y access node identifier ES3500 circuit id Active identifier string option spv delimiter M Apply 4 Enter 1 for both Start VI D and End VID Click Apply aum D Intermediate Agent Show VLAN start VID 1 End VID 1 VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No Y O O 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add the
15. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tory Eme ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Choose All connected or Port isolation Wizard All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management po
16. Cancel Clear Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off
17. Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 207 Chapter 25 AAA 25 2 3 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 114 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup EE Authentication Type Privilege Enable Login Authorization Type Exec Dot1x Accounting Update Period Type System Exec Dotix Commands Method 1 local flocal Method 2 Ey L s Method 3 x L 3 Active Method E radius O radius a minutes Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege E L1 radius n ri start stop radius O O start stop radius y m O stop only tacacs D E Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section
18. IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling settings on the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 8 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION sFlow This link takes you to screens where you can configure sFlow settings on the Switch PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPOE client Errdisable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure CPU protection and error disable recovery Priva
19. LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically Static IP Address Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that
20. Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save 3 Save JA Status Fl Logout H Help at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 38 3 on page 286 for more information about how to save your configuration ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 46 Troubleshooting ES3500 Series User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 149 Commonly Used Services
21. Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected Off The system is functioning normally 10 100Base TX Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet 1 24 network on The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down PoE Amber On This port is providing power over Ethernet Ede Off This port is not providing power over Ethernet Mini GBI C Slots LNK Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down ACT Green Blinking This port is receiving or transmitting data 1000Base T Ethernet Ports in Dual personality Interface ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 5 ES3500 24HP LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link
22. The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 212 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS I P Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session D The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 25 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 78 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS I dentifier v v v NAS IP Address Y v v Service Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v Table 79 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS I dentifier Y v v NAS IP Address Y v v Service Type v v v Calling Station Id Y v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session Id Y v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate
23. Yes vj v v 125 No Y O ad 126 No v O O 127 No O O 128 No v O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN Circuit id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Remote id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile
24. 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 returns to the normal operating range ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 voltage VoltageEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the voltage goes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 above or below the normal operating range ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 VoltageEventClear ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the voltage 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 returns to the normal operating range ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 127 SNMP System Traps continued 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION reset UncontrolledResetEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 automatically resets ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 ControlledResetEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the Switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 resets by an administrator through a management interface ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator throu
25. Cause v ES3500 Series User s Guide 213 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 80 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS IP Address v v v NAS Port v v v Class v v v Called Station Id v v v Calling Station Id v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS Port Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Input Octets v v Acct Output Octets v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Input Packets v v Acct Output Packets v v Acct Terminate Cause v Acct Input Gigawords v v Acct Output Gigawords v v EN ES3500 Series User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 26 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there
26. Figure 12 ES3500 24HP Rear Panel AC Power Connection Figure 13 ES3500 8PD Front Panel LEDs Dual personality Interfaces ETT i s PA mu o PA L L LJ 1 y S CHE m messes gu O A3 LA 5 ee ADEMAS s a d ones F Ethernet Ports PoE In Console Port Figure 14 ES3500 8PD Rear Panel rowir DC Power Connection The following table describes the connectors on the front and rear panels Table 3 Front and Rear Panel Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION 10 100 Mbps Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router RJ 45 Ethernet Ports Dual Each dual personality interface has one RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable Personality SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port or transceiver active at a time Interfaces e RJ 45 Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using Category 5 5e 6 copper cables e SFP Slots Use SFP transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Ethernet switches Console Port The console port is for local configuration of the Switch AC Power Connect an appropriate power supply to this port Connection DC Power Connect an appropriate power supply to this port Connection ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software conf
27. Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 101 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile g Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Ada Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP add
28. Qa Huay Name Titel Raymond Huang Quality amp Customer Service Division Assistant VP Datum JJJJ MM TT 2011 1 24 Declaraci n de Producto Ecol gico Rous Directiva ROHS 2002 95 EC VERIFIED Directiva REEE 2002 96 EC REEE Residuos de Equipos El ctricos y Electr nicos 2008 34 EC Ea Carpal Huag Nombre Titulo Raymond Huang Quality amp Customer Service Division Assistant VP Fecha aaaa mm dd 2011 1 24 Firma de declaraci n FRANCAIS ITALIANO NEDERLANDS D claration de Produit Green Mis Directive RoHS 2002 95 EC VERIFIED Directive DEEE 2002 96 EC DEEE D chets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques 2008 34 EC E 2 Signature de la d claration Carpal Huay Nom Titre Raymond Huang Quality amp Customer Service Division Assistant VP Date aaaa mm jj 2011 1 24 Dichiarazione Green Product A S Direttiva RoHS 2002 95 CE VERIFIED Direttiva RAEE 2002 96 CE RAEE Rifiuti di Apparecchiature Elettriche ed Elettroniche 2008 34 EC Firma dichiarazione Nomej titolo Raymond Huang Quality amp Customer Service Division Assistant VP Data aaaa mm gg 2011 1 24 Productmilieuverklaring eu S RoHS richtlijn 2002 95 EC AEEA richtlijn 2002 96 EC AEEA Afgedankte Elektrische en Elektronische Apparaten 2008 34 EC Ez p Verklaringshandtekening aquel Huay Naam titel Raymond Huang Quality 8 Customer Service Divisio
29. Table 133 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 39 3 3 on page 294 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 3 6 Configuring SNMP User From the SNMP screen click User to view the screen as shown Use the User scree
30. Y Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 5 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden I Tx Tagging 6 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 7 Normal i Forbidden I Tx Tagging 8 Normal i Forbidden Tx Tagging ix X Aa Cancel Clear 3 Go to Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 E VLAN Port Setting Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation gt n 3 4GZ n Al r 1 n fi m an y Cr O 2 n fi rH an y O O 3 Dn fi DH an y D rH 4 O D at y O 5 r n lan y r n TEE ro m3 z r 7 m O an y O a Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply PES BRE snooping Configure d Pot VLAN Active Vv C Disable DHCP VT n e 100 DHCP Snooping Database Agent URL Timeout interval o0 seconds Write delay interval oo seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL _Renew 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner DHCP Snooping I 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the S
31. or via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide 27 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note Th e loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 133 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Port ao i a Wm E Loop Guard NS an a Ae A ee ee Apply Cancel Active O Active 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature ES3500 Serie
32. so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 42 1 Cluster Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 142 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member
33. specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt I P Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 120 DHCP Snooping Configure DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active a rp Disable C an 6 Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 26 5 2 on page 226 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch t
34. 05 28 Static Change Pages Next 74 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 9 Enter 123 in the PVID field for ports 2 3 4 and 25 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory NBUEXBELHEIDSSGDCENNENNE Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation All y 5 O 1 O All o O 6 1 All O a 7 1 C All v O F 8 1 O All x O Gear cara 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 6 2 Creating a Private VLAN Rule Follow the steps below to configure private VLAN for VLAN 123 1 Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Inthe Private VLAN screen select Active Enter a descriptive name PrivateVLAN123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN ID field Click Add EH Private VLAN NND Active v Name PrivateVLAN123 VLAN ID 123 Add Cancel Clear
35. 126 MSTP 124 126 bridge ID 140 141 configuration 136 139 configuration digest 141 forwarding delay 137 Hello Time 140 hello time 137 Max Age 140 max age 137 max hops 137 MST region 127 network example 127 path cost 138 port priority 138 revision level 137 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 124 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 87 multicast 187 802 1 priority 189 and IGMP 187 IGMP throttling 191 IP addresses 187 overview 187 setup 189 multicast group 193 multicast VLAN 198 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 126 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 126 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 124 Multiple STP 126 Multiple STP see MSTP 126 MVR 194 configuration 196 group configuration 198 network example 194 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 194 N network applications 19 network management system NMS 292 NTP RFC 1305 86 O other documentation 2 P PAGP 245 password 43 administrator 306 PHB Per Hop Behavior 270 ping test connection 317 PoE 94 policy 173 175 and classifier 173 and DiffServ 172 configuration 173 example 176 overview 172 rules 172 viewing 175 policy configuration 175 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 157 and RADIUS 203 EEE802 1x 160 163 206 MAC authentication 158 port based VLAN type 89 port cloning 332 334 advanced settings 332 334 basic settings 332 334 ES3500 Series User s Guide C Index port details 81 port
36. 2 Supported MIBs The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 39 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 are specific to the ES3500 24 switch The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 are specific to the ES3500 8PD switch The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 are specific to the ES3500 24HP switch Note OIDs are common across all models unless otherwise indicated by the model number Table 127 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn ES3500 24HP This trap is sent when the fan speed 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 goes above or below
37. 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal Type value Refer to Table 55 on page 170 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 53 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Protocol Select an IP protoc
38. 54 IGMP Sriogping and VLANS rias 188 212 a DOSE SS A tei pues cM TR bud 188 ci Aq Toren un ps NERA T ETE 189 2AA GMP Snooping VLAN REN 192 24 5 OMF Filerna ProfIS ai epa ade poa Hao raa eb o pana p Lao 193 ACKER A alee endateaseeen a 194 Oc Types OF IM PoR m m 195 NON MEA We sn a 195 ie anten dies E OOO 195 217 General MYR Configuration semana 196 208 UNE UE COBIBROUESUO cu oo o 198 24 8 1 MYR Configuration Example coi 199 Chapter 25 PPP sniinnastadeniaasacconsdized ERRANT EEUU AUI ERU RR UEARULAEAA UU L AERA ELU HALE R HERE OMA 202 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA seeeeeseeeeee 202 moo Toa calles COMAS Met m EF E 202 212 RADIUS Sd BASE Guest prd ated ease aioe abt adn nra patna 203 zo AR ODE eiae oat o6 esca lb e EU Gua fia DOS dua Ut E VUA UU La Rene un Qd ER Ra Sud 203 29 2 T RADIUS Serner CEUD e et 203 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 202 2 TADACDA SUBE DOE Lenses prd a nud pci ti dapi 206 EE AE A NMS 208 25 24 Vendor SOSCIIG PALMS a 210 Soo TUMOPI OCO ARDU AS 211 2545 Supported RADIUS ADUS nadia 211 25 9 1 Attrib tes Used for Authentication sssrinin a 212 25 3 2 Atiributes Used TOL ACCOUnNUNG corso o ia aaea 212 Chapter 26 IP Source USO siii a 215 Po NM SOU Guard OPS ici 215 26 tol DHCP SIDO LAS ani AS 215 zB t2 ARP InspecuamntovervidW aa 217 c wd cilc GURE oian a a a ante dkaraareatonene 219 263 IP Source Guard Statie BI ci ao 219 PGA DACP SnG o sac
39. 82 217 trusted ports 216 untrusted ports 216 DHCP snooping database 216 diagnostics 317 Ethernet port test 317 ping 317 system log 317 Differentiated Service DiffServ 270 DiffServ 270 activate 272 and TRTCM 274 DS field 270 DSCP 270 network example 270 PHB 270 disclaimer 345 documentation related 2 double tagged frames 180 DS Differentiated Services 270 DSCP service level 270 what it does 270 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 270 Dual personality interfaces description 19 location 29 dynamic link aggregation 149 E EEE 265 egress port 115 Energy Efficient Ethernet 265 Error Disable 65 error disable detect 260 error disable recovery configuration 261 overview 258 Ethernet broadcast address 330 Ethernet port test 317 A ES3500 Series User s Guide Index external authentication server 203 F FCC interference statement 345 file transfer using FTP command example 289 filename convention configuration 289 filtering 122 rules 122 filtering database MAC table 327 firmware 85 upgrade 287 323 flow control 94 back pressure 94 IEEE802 3x 94 forwarding delay 137 frames tagged 106 untagged 106 front panel 28 FTP 289 file transfer procedure 290 restrictions over WAN 290 G GARP 100 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 100 GARP terminology 100 GARP timer 90 100 general setup 86 getting help 45 Gigabit ports 30 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 87 Green Ethernet 265 Gu
40. ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT lication System Info General Setup Basic Setting IP Application Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Advanced Application ing pplication Management Static Routing DiffServ Maintenance Access Control Switch Setup DHCP Diagnostic IP Setup Filtering Syslog Port Setup Spanning Tree Protocol Cluster Management PoE Bandwidth Control MAC Table Broadcast Storm Control ARP Table Mirroring Configure Clone Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling sFlow PPPoE Errdisable Private VLAN Green Ethernet Note Only the ES3500 24HP has a PoE menu Note Only the ES3500 8PD has a Green Ethernet menu The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 8 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and time settings for the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC add
41. Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight Q0 Q7 When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Hybrid SPQ Lowest Queue This field is applicable only when you select WFQ o
42. C CDP 244 certifications 345 notices 346 viewing 346 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 99 changing the password 43 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 128 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 126 Class of Service CoS 270 classifier 167 169 and QoS 167 editing 169 example 171 overview 167 setup 167 169 viewing 169 CLI Reference Guide 2 cloning a port See port cloning 334 cluster management 321 ES3500 Series User s Guide E Index and switch passwords 326 cluster manager 321 325 cluster member 321 326 cluster member firmware upgrade 323 network example 321 setup 325 specification 321 status 322 switch models 321 VID 326 web configurator 323 cluster manager 321 cluster member 321 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 126 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 128 configuration 269 change running config 286 file names 289 configuration file 44 backup 288 restore 44 288 saving 286 configuration saving 43 console port 30 copying port settings See port cloning 334 copyright 345 CPU management port 112 CPU protection configuration 259 overview 258 current date 87 current time 86 D daylight saving time 87 default Ethernet settings 30 DHCP 278 configuration options 278 modes 278 relay agent 278 relay example 283 setup 282 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 278 DHCP relay option 82 217 DHCP snooping 52 215 configuring 217 DHCP relay option
43. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 43 1 MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address alread
44. Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 38 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Firmware is uploaded to the current image See Section 38 8 on page 289 for more information about images and uploading firmware to a different image Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device Click Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next Figure 175 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting check box if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System I nfo screen to verify your current firmware version numb
45. DHCP snooping 216 PPPoEIA 252 user profiles 202 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 25 VID 99 102 103 182 number of possible VIDs 99 priority frame 99 VID VLAN Identifier 99 VLAN 87 99 acceptable frame type 106 automatic registration 100 ID 99 ingress filtering 106 introduction 87 number of VLANs 102 port number 103 port settings 105 port based VLAN 112 port based all connected 115 port based isolation 115 port based wizard 115 static VLAN 104 status 102 103 tagged 99 trunking 101 106 type 89 101 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 87 VLANID 92 VLAN mapping 238 ES3500 Series User s Guide Index activating 239 configuration 240 example 238 priority level 238 tagged 238 traffic flow 238 untagged 238 VLAN ID 238 VLAN stacking 180 182 configuration 183 example 180 frame format 182 port roles 181 183 port based Q in Q 184 priority 182 selective Q in Q 185 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 106 VSA 210 VT100 30 VTP 245 W warranty 346 note 347 web configurator 37 getting help 45 layout 38 login 37 logout 45 navigation panel 40 weight queuing 178 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 178 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 178 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 289 ES3500 Series User s Guide Index ES3500 Series User s Guide
46. Figure 110 AAA Server B8 N HERES M Clien AAA Server 25 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 39 on page 292 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 72 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for authentication All communication between the client the Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 25 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority a
47. General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 120 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always O for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings General Setup ES3500 Series User s Guide 279 Chapter 37 DHCP 37 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 166 P Application gt DHCP gt Global a AAA Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Option 82 ES3500 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Server 1 3 Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to
48. General Setup screen Figure 20 Web Configurator Login Connect to 192 168 1 1 The server 192 168 1 1 at ES3500 at Thu Jan 1 01 19 29 1970 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password Remember my password 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Web Configurator Layout The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator ES ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 21 The Web Configurator Layout ZyXEL El Save Status El Logout E Help Basic Setting Port Status J Advanced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts E x KI KB s e q Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 IP Application 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00000 y Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
49. Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 2 3 4 and 25 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Port nfe w Nj O ONO Xin END ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Control Normal O Normal O Fixed O Normal Fixed O Normal Fixed 9 Normal O Fixed 9 Normal O Fixed Normal O Fixed Normal O Normal Normal v VLAN123 El O v O Forbidden O O Forbidden O O Forbidden O O Forbidden Y O Forbidden M O Forbidden M O Forbidden v O Forbidden Forbidden VLAN Status Tagging Tx Tagging TxTagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Normal Forbidden C Tx Tagging 26 Normal O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 27 9 Normal O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 28 Normal O Forbidden v Tx Tagging aa cones 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen c VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 3 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 5 19 47 Static 2 102 5 19 47 Static 3 123 0
50. IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode 7 c ef cl m Lu fm pez ao y 1 C 6h cko r fo Deny pez Auc 2 cle cko r ll bey Detz Ao s 3 c emo choo r p Deny Dez o s 4 6h cko r ll Dey peewz Auo 5s chm cko m f Dey pez Auto gt O o X now a cen Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that
51. Low 0 0 0 0 z Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 5 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 6 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 ne em en Mus O a Low 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Basic Setting gt PoE Status in Classification or Consumption mode LABEL DESCRIPTION PoE Status PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch whether it is enabled devices on the PoE ports Total Power This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 18 Basic Setting gt PoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Consuming Power W This field displays the total amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected PoE enabled devices Allocated Power W This field displays the total amount of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after negotiating with the connected PoE device s Consuming Power W can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power W Remaining Power W This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE Note The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a PoE device even if the PoE device needs less than 16 W Port This is the port index number State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch You can set this in the Basic Setting gt PoE Status scr
52. MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 MSTI 2 13 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 61 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol a EXTRANET Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second uU 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the S
53. Marker Traffic Policing essere 271 882 1 TRTO GOP HNA Made Suri ada E P lc RE abc 272 36 2 2 VEL ICRC Or re ro eR 272 e 272 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings ssessesee 273 36 32 Canigurina DSGP PIES ds 275 2364 DSCP to IEEE 8021p Prony Sell ur ea 276 35 1 Configuring DSGP BOUINGS arias ad dp uua ad daa oa 276 Chapter 37 bj 278 crA NIA QA UI Ae e nadia 278 A io Fe 278 ac Le DHOPAXORUOU SED CIBIONE ias 278 2 DHOP ORUS s Ear 278 o A A KT ES 279 27 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent MOMO eiii riadas resina 279 37 22 Don gurng DHOP Global Roay cat 280 37 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example sese 281 374 Camiguiin q DHCP i Ec up cR 282 374 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANS ccoo 283 Chapter 38 ciii 285 95 1 The el ANAC SEBEN ri ii 285 anc Logd Paste Deal 2ugsseregei ebecoi RS URERU RO REEGORER amnion anc p a d cha Kuba da cR Qa d 286 30 3 Eve ORBE OUI occasion iino dd asus desea avon san SW abide A daa Sis dub e dried abd 286 x E Mer ANY ANTE e 286 AS AMA UA s mee E PN 287 20 0 Restore a Longe oi FIE said 288 387 Backup a COU on Ple ccs mm 288 STA ATA II ca A NEE dad UR 289 98 81 Filename CORnVSMOE suis dais 289 anos FTP Command Line Procedura a ced acetals Ka RE peat ala wate 290 300 23 DUEBABEO FTE ir o 290 JO DA F T
54. Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged ES3500 Series User s Guide 271 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services 36 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 159 TRTCM Color blind Mode Exceed NO 36 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing pack
55. Multi Host 1 4 1 Multi Host 1 5 F 1 Multi Host 1 O 1 Multi Host 1 7 1 Multi Host 1 8 a 1 Mult Host 1 9 1 Multi Host 1 10 O Multi Ho Y or ee ca d agenti 27 1 Multi Host v 1 28 1 Multi Host 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number ia Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited services Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non authenticated users to access limited network resources through the Switch You must also enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on the Switch and the associated ports Enter the number that identifies the guest VLAN Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 50 Advanced Application gt Port Authentic
56. RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through
57. Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control Table 42 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Por
58. Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 5 on page 126 for more information on MSTP Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP a Multiple Spanning ree Protoco Port Status Bridge Active Hello Time 2 seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 seconds Maximum hops 20 Configuration Name 0019cb004701 Revision Number 0 Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 128 19 2 128 19 3 128 119 4 128 19 5 128 19 6 128 19 7 12 Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Click Port to display the MSTP Port Configuration screen see Figure 69 on page 139 Status Click Status to display th
59. Type VLAN Trunking Isolation r L O All m 1 1 r1 All Y rH 2 n 1 m All y n B 3 O 1 C All v n rH 4 n 1 O All E r m 5 1 All Da Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 24 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this to disable ingress filtering PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between land 4094 a
60. VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 49 08 49 Static Change Pages Previous Next In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE Iv Name Example VLAN Group ID 2 Port Control Tagging Iv TxTagging 2 Normal Fixed Forbidden v TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 C Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed Forbidden M Tx Tagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 9 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 1 Fixe f Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to inc
61. VLAN 200 for example before they can authenticate with the authentication server In this guest VLAN clients can surf the Internet through the default gateway attached to port 10 but are not allowed to access other network resources such as the mail server or local data base EE VLAN 1 Ill Guest VLAN 200 Internet 2 Ports 1 2 3 and 10 6 5 1 Creating a Guest VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 1 2 3 and 10 as a member of VLAN 200 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s port which is not in VLAN 200 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Goto Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 10 Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Switch Setup o 802 10 Port Based Smart Isolation Active VLAN Type MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level7 Level6 Level5 Level4 Level3 Level2 Levelt Level t o tw BRIiUuwIOo 4 Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 200 for example in the Name field and enter 200 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 1 2 3 and 10 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check
62. VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 9 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the following screen Select either All Connected or Port Isolated from the drop down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN security requirements If VLAN members need to communicate directly with each other then select All Connected Select Port Isolated if you want to restrict users from communicating directly Click Apply to save your settings ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based all connected VLAN con
63. action you configure Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or allow specific packets on a port after the error was gone Deselect this option to turn off this rule ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable Table 110 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Interval Enter the number of seconds from 30 to 2592000 for the time interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 262 ES3500 Series User s Guide Private VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a VLAN 33 1 Private VLAN Overview Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way If you enable a private VLAN rule for a VLAN on the Switch the Switch automatically adds all ports except the uplink por
64. and accounting settings on the Switch 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 25 1 2 on page 203 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 25 1 2 on page 203 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers
65. blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to a
66. box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports 68 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ACTIVE Name O Normal O Normal Normal Normal Normal O Normal 9 Normal 9 Normal O Normal 1 2 3 4 5 O Normal 6 7 8 9 ETA VLAN Group ID Control Normal v O Fixed O Fixed 9 Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed ixe Cy Ea O Forbidden O Forbidden Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden O Forbidden VLAN Status Tagging Tx Tagging C Tx Tagging CI Tx Tagging C Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging Tx Tagging 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen The Number of VLAN 4 Index M os N d VID 102 123 200 VLAN Search by VID VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN Elapsed Time 2 59 05 2 59 05 2 59 05 0 00 07 Ses Status Static Static Static Static 9 Enter 200 in the PVID field for ports 1 2 3 and 10 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag
67. byte bytes 31 1 3 Port State Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection You can also specify the agent sub options circuit ID and remote ID that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Chapter 31 PPPoE Trusted ports are connected to PPPOE servers f a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports f a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers f a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port 31 2 The PPPoE Screen Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch
68. caused network congestion Figure 140 sFlow Application sFlow Agent mE RN EE N ee fi sFlow Collector ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow 30 2 sFlow Port Configuration Click Advanced Application gt sFlow in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 141 Advanced Application gt sFlow Active 27 28 ETE Collector SA O MN ea el Sample rate poll interval Collector Address 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Advanced Application gt sFlow LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable the sFlow agent on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to allow the Switch to monitor traffic
69. client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 167 Global DHCP Relay Network Example SS DHCP Server 7 192 168 1 100 Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 168 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DHCP Relay g Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay
70. coclIi o CO NM Co Cn 4 CO Nh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments to each port if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Rate Limit pkt Enter a number from O to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or S transmit per second O means no rate limit You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded See Section 32 5 on page 260 for detailed information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 5 Error Disable Detect Configuration Use screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Click the Click Here link n
71. could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP addres
72. defines ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory EDRU Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP Fi Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation A 1 O All y O O O O O O 2 O O O O 3 O O O O 4 O 1 O All Y O O 5 O 1 O All Y 1 O 6 L1 1 O Al O O Y O 1 O All oO L1 8 O 1 O All v O O 9 O 1 O All Y O O 11 E All Y cm 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Follow the steps below to enable port authentication to validate access to ports 1 8 to clients based on a RADIUS server 1 Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication and then the Click Here link for 802 1x Port Authentication Click here Click here 802 1x MAC Authentication ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select the first Active checkbox to enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch Select the Active checkboxes for ports 1 to 8 to turn on 802 1x authentication on the selected ports Click Apply c IAD Port Authentication Guest Vlan Active Port NAE Max Req Reauth Reauth period Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs O On AN o 1 vl 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 2 e 2 On 3600 60
73. describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 99 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN e ED Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE 5 Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal y Iv TxTagging 1 Norma C Fixed Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Norma C Fixed C Forbid
74. egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame TPID carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a time ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 63 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 1 Por
75. enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 223 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 84 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 223 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packe
76. enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 167 for more information ES3500 Series User s Guide 172 Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 90 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule DINTE Active O Name Classifier s General Rate Limit Bandwidth Kbps Egress Port 1 Parameters Priority ov DSCP TOS Ov Forwarding G O No change O Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priorit 9 No change O Setthe packets 802 1p priority and send the packetto priority queue O Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value and send the packetto priority queue Diffserv Action O No change O Setthe packets TOS field Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing O Send the packetto the egress port Rate Limit O Enable The following table d
77. entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown next Figure 183 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Logins _ Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm bs ES3500 Series User s Guide 305 Chapter 39 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the admini
78. es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 105 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID 8 Group Configuration m NND s MVR Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop down list VLAN ID box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 187 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 187 for more information on IP multicast ad
79. etudes Nu RU M T ARR 43 OSA LOS pee T 43 A C RESCUE WHC em 44 21 Beloasd the Coniguraton FIE secc iia 44 4 7 Logging Outor the Web Configurator vna 45 ZH PGES eet an e teer na e na b on men dtes a pM nd aaa as mae ia EE 45 Chapter 5 a es o Gee ee eiei pia aaa aeai 47 A mp a reer ee bee i db 47 Bi LW eae VLAN ni 47 Et IA POR VIO sr sami NUT UN 49 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address s ciiiccctncesazascsscessccsetsterasaseecesenosissnevadcenewedsceane 50 Chapter 6 AAA O PGE nn 52 Ba How to Use DHCP Snooping ON the SWIER ci A da rate i eaput 52 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on Tie Swen acid 55 821 DACP Relay Tutonal itn icono 56 EE CAI vL coca is piola ai 56 023 Omaira AP BEIN e 58 OT T AINE sds cts tac M 59 5 2 How to Use PPPOE IA of the WII si Seoese cami b Dau Ga ub 5g ELM Edce uei rr P RR 60 Bn CONTI AMIA ira o hc Pol Ran OR AR bb Gu Pha add 62 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch ssssssssssssees 65 CO HOW to Sel Up a Guest VLAN sa 67 e A a aa abana aS 67 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1x Port Authentcalion iia 70 553 hal Gussi VLAN rar A keene 71 6 6 How to Do Port isolation in a VLAN socios ocio r2 601 Creating a VLAN m costs tao encedee ent E 73 6052 Grmaling a Private LAN BU 15i cba prin Re ORE aan johns A ve Rad tL RM 75 Part ll Technical Reference sisi ENPF ALIQU Ma RR CERE Gab ak GERE KEERRMS 77 Chapter 7 System Status and P
80. exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 13 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 32 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With M
81. have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 2 on page 33 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 4 6 on page 44 6 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions ES3500 Series User s Guide 337 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet If you have configured a secured cli
82. is illustrated in the following examples e 4 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second e 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Type how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 127 ARP Inspection Port Configure x nspection Trusted State Untrusted
83. is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection 26 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 26 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second ES3500 Series User s Guide 215 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP p
84. is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix A Common Services ES3500 Series User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright O 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change
85. isolation 115 port mirroring 147 direction 148 egress 148 ingress 148 port redundancy 149 port security 165 address learning 166 limit MAC address learning 166 MAC address learning 165 overview 165 setup 165 236 244 port setup 93 port status 79 port VLAN trunking 101 port based VLAN 112 all connected 115 port isolation 115 settings wizard 115 ports standby 149 diagnostics 317 mirroring 147 speed duplex 94 power connector 33 Power over Ethernet 94 power status 85 power voltage 85 PPPoE IA 59 trusted ports 252 untrusted ports 252 priority level 90 priority queue assignment 90 private VLAN 263 configuration 264 isolated port 263 overview 263 promiscuous port 263 product registration 347 protocol based VLAN 109 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 109 example 111 hexadecimal notation for protocols 108 110 isolate traffic 109 priority 108 110 PVID 99 106 PVID Priority Frame 99 Q Qos and classifier 167 queue weight 178 queuing 177 SPQ 178 WRR 178 queuing method 177 179 R rack mounting 25 RADIUS 203 advantages 203 and authentication 203 Network example 202 server 203 settings 203 setup 203 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 124 reboot load configuration 286 reboot system 286 Reference Guide CLI 2 registration product 347 related documentation 2 remote management 315 service 316 trusted computers 316 resetting 44 286 to factory default settings 286 restoring config
86. lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOP ING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent I nformation field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 37 on page 278 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Ch
87. manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information a
88. memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 257 Error Disable This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port and set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone 32 1 CPU Protection Overview Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information If a switch receives large numbers of control packets such as ARP BPDU or IGMP packets which are to be processed by the CPU the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks properly The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered to the CPU on a port This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or errors from other network s You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received 32 2 Error Disable Recovery Overview Some features such as loop guard or CPU protection allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port For example if the Switch detects that packets sen
89. mode if you want more ports to be active ES3500 Series User s Guide VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes for the TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes for the TCI Tag Control Information starting after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame me
90. number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 150 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffi
91. octies teri CC re ener err ee reer rer ep eey ener Cen ree renee er tM t tree ere cenetr tear 221 260 DHGP ano CMO sosun ispi aS tpi sse a a eat a pb 223 25831 DHCP NOD POr CODIGUEG o o dada C aa rubus adatta 225 25 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN I COnflgulg na 226 EOD ARP Mep ciom IIIS a a ap i 227 26 001 ARP Inspection VLAN SUS como ep Oi Sa te Sp v aba Eee dun persi UH 228 25 5 2 ARP Inepecton Log SIGUE sonoro ii 229 8 7 coire eise T ee Pd PES 230 26 71 ARP Inspection Fon CONO neta 231 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Lisa iere dene b e deve e re Di aidan 233 Chapter 27 f pego Mem 234 PA Pa boop Guard ES em E 234 At etal Wa ote Guard SUP a 236 Chapter 28 SLAN TI a a 238 29 VLAN ISP VEEN cs A ka AE sad Der dal clap 238 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example secos 238 ce ERARIO EAN MEDI a 239 284 Lentaddng VEAN Mapping ra 240 Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunn elitigi stecitentecrcccteectsonascanvadinwianandeccassuaninnianrdcansnernbladseinaceivaccadasss 242 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview sisse id 242 29 1 1 Layor 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode cinta cnn in cina unninn anaa a 243 292 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneli issnin annaas 244 ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Table of Contents Chapter 30 AP nn 246 Cale rU E DI ENERO a aa aa a a 246 Cp eain o dde uenis 17 1 ori PER 247 2027 Flow Collector ONU iau cr aeaa abi td 248 Chapter 31 PR POE cisne iii 250 31 1 PPPOE Intermediate Agent D
92. on this port and generate and send sFlow datagram to the specified collector Sample rate Enter a number N from 256 to 65535 The Switch captures every one out of N packets for this port and creates sFlow datagram poll interval Specify a time interval from 20 to 120 in seconds the Switch waits before sending the sFlow datagram and packet counters for this port to the collector ES3500 Series User s Guide 247 Chapter 30 sFlow Table 97 Advanced Application gt sFlow continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Address Note You must have the sFlow collector already configured in the sFlow gt Collector screen The sFlow collector does not need to be in the same subnet as the Switch but it must be accessible from the Switch Note Configure UDP port 6343 the default on a NAT router to allow port forwarding if the collector is behind a NAT router Configure a firewall rule for UDP port 6343 the default to allow incoming traffic if the collector is behind a firewall Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 2 1 sFlow Collector Configuration Click the Collector link
93. prevent communications between ports in a VLAN but still allow them to access the Internet or network resources through the uplink port in the same VLAN You use private VLAN to ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials do port isolation in a VLAN instead of assigning each port to a separate VLAN and creating a different IP routing domain for each individual port s Internet In this example you put ports 2 to 4 and 25 in VLAN 123 and create a private VLAN rule for VLAN 123 to block traffic between ports 2 3 and 4 6 6 1 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 3 4 and 25 as a member of VLAN 123 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s port which is not in VLAN 123 2 Goto Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory a Switch Setup g VLAN Type Port Based Smart Isolation Active T MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level7 7 Level6 6 y Level5 5 Level4 do Level3 E d Level2 1s Level1 Dy Level 2 w Ai 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN Group ID field ES3500 Series User s
94. ras 1 is image 2 ras You can store up to two images or firmware files of the same device model on the Switch Only one image is used at a time Runthe boot image lt 1 2 gt command to specify which image is updated when firmware is loaded using the web configurator and to specify which image is loaded when the Switch starts up You can also use FTP commands to upload firmware to any image The Switch supports dual firmware images ras 0 and ras 1 You can switch from one to the other by using the boot image index command where index is 1 ras 0 or 2 ras 1 See the CLI Reference Guide for more information about using commands The system does not reboot after it switches from one image to the other 38 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware bin ras 0 This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config ras 0 and ras 1 Be sure you keep unaltered copies of all files for later use ES3500 Series User s Guide 289 Chapter 38 Maintenance Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may
95. remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 203 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown Figure 113 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup C TACACS Server Setup Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 ag O 2 0 0 0 0 ag O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 ag 2 0 0 0 0 ag O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode
96. screen Table 82 P Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above ES3500 Series Us
97. screen to their last saved values 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 37 on page 278 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 122 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ED DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Option82 information iS No y Ci C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 86 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to
98. session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks T
99. snooping database ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry Abort timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last su
100. source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus should be Application copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Configuration 46 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the Switch is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch For the ES3500 8PD make sure the upstream PSE is connected to port 9 and t
101. switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 199 Clustering Application Example BEE BSE SBHBEB EP ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management 42 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 200 Management gt Cluster Management Status Clustering Management Status Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Model GS 2024 Name Status Online Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 143 Management gt Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following fields Member describe
102. table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 24 3 on page 189 Figure 52 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup within a VLAN group Figure 53 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3 Figure 54 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 52 No Static Multicast Forwarding E 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Active Name VID Port Static Multicast Forwarding MAC Address r M L EH lH B b p A Index Active Add
103. the PPPoE client and or the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet The identifier string slot ID port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space An Agent Circuit ID Sub option example is Switch 07 0123 and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client which is connected to the Switch s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123 Table 102 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Using Identifier String and Variables SubOpt Length Value Identifier delimiter Slot ID delimiter Port No delimiter VLAN ID Stri iid 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 53 byte 31 1 2 2 WT 101 Default Circuit ID Syntax If you do not configure a Circuit 1D string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port and disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent screen the Switch automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is defined in the DSL Forum Working Text WT 101 The default access node identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates Ethernet Table 103 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Defined in WT 101 SubOpt Length Value Access Space eth Space Slot Port No VLAN Node ID ID Identifier 1 3 1 1 2 1 byte byte byte 1 byte byte byte 4 20 byte
104. the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 26 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status Figure 125 ARP Inspection Log Status Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID Sender Mac ARP Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Sender IP NumPkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the
105. the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed return to the normal operating range ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 127 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION poe PwrPortFailedEventOn ES3500 24HP This trap is sent when the port is 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 turned off to supply power due to overloading over system budget or short circuit PwrPortFailedEventClear ES3500 24HP This trap is sent when the port returns 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 to the normal state and has the ability to supply power PsePwrFailedEventOn ES3500 24HP This trap is sent when the power 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 supply of PoE failed The trigger situation includes internal external power supply failure external fan speed failure and external power has exceed normal temperature PsePwrFailedEventClear ES3500 24HP This trap is sent when the power 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 supply of PoE returns to the normal state temperature TemperatureEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the temperature 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 goes above or below the normal operating range ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 TemperatureEventClear ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the temperature
106. the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 octets and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model ES3500 Series User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as temperatures The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the
107. this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 24 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address
108. to an Ethernet network is down Table 6 ES3500 8PD LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected Off The system is functioning normally 10 100Base TX Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet 1 8 network on The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down Mini GBIC Slots LNK Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down ACT Green Blinking This port is receiving or transmitting data 1000Base T Ethernet Ports in Dual personality Interface LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The
109. to enable private VLAN in a VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN to which this rule applies Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of the rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied Delete Cancel Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Green Ethernet This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to reduce the power consumed by switch ports 34 1 Green Ethernet Overview Green Ethernet reduces switch port power consumption in the following ways IEEE 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet EEE If EEE is enabled both sides of a link support E
110. to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth Control allowed on a port Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to screens where you can activate and configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features
111. tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 139 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Port X0 109 749 oo Oh O ND 1 A NES aio ayer 2 Protoco Active Destination MAC Address eo o az aHa Ha HoHa HaHaHa HaHaHa Hn 4 due iqq qiii pei ENS i B QT pe pp M ce EE ae Nd ae an unne fe EP SN Point to Point PAGP LACP UDLD O Bd 7 v Mode Access y Access Access y Access y Access y Access Y Access Access y Access y Access y Access y doo ondo io o io d oka THER Access y sao a e a a BOE Be e o qe a Ha HaHaHa Haga a a paa HD ga bees e Pesa JE a Easel p a 0 o 0 o O 0 0 0 0 01 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with whic
112. ventilated RPM cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 3 General
113. view what kind of MAC address it is ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address IP address resolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to an other port s ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 22 Change Administrator Login Password Logins Access Control Administrator Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 3 Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You
114. without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information 2 3 CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may b
115. you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again Management IP Addresses You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address T
116. 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 131 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 36 2 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 36 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 36 2 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 107 70 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 107 70 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 107 70 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 36 2 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 36 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 36 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 107 70 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 107 70 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 107 70 2 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 T
117. 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 AT Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 O Any O Port A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 38 3 on page 286 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to log out of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 7 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING
118. 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 46 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 47 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN OLE EN Vlan Port Setting Active O Port Name amp JIP v Ethernet type C Others Hex VID Priority o v Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 99 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol nu
119. 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 16 10 100 Figure 170 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs bl DHCP 192 168 1 100 E DHCP 172 16 10 100 i For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 171 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example TG VLAN q Status VID 2 Remote DHCP Server 1 172 16 10 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0000 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information E Option 82 Information C ES3500 Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 1 Relay 192 168 1 100 O Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP ES3500 Series User s Guide This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 38 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 172 Management gt Maintenance Maintenance LEE Maintenance Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 123 Management gt Maintenance
120. 25 forwarding delay 131 134 Hello BPDU 125 Hello Time 131 132 133 135 how it works 125 Max Age 131 132 134 135 path cost 124 131 134 port priority 131 134 port state 125 root port 125 status 132 134 140 terminology 124 vs loop guard 234 subnet based VLANs 106 and DHCP VLAN 108 and priority 106 configuration 107 switch lockout 43 switch reset 44 switch setup 89 syslog 218 318 protocol 318 server setup 320 settings 319 ES3500 Series User s Guide 357 Index setup 319 severity levels 318 system information 84 system log 317 system reboot 286 T TACACS 203 setup 206 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 202 tagged VLAN 99 temperature indicator 85 terminal emulation 30 time current 86 time zone 87 Time RFC 868 86 time server 86 time service protocol 86 format 86 trademarks 345 transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA 31 transceivers 31 installation 31 removal 32 traps destination 302 TRTCM and bandwidth control 274 and DiffServ 274 color aware mode 272 color blind mode 272 setup 273 trunk group 149 trunking 149 example 155 trusted ports ARP inspection 218 DHCP snooping 216 PPPoEIA 252 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 211 tutorials 52 DHCP snooping 52 Error Disable 65 PPPoEIA 59 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 271 Type of Service ToS 270 U UDLD 245 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 218
121. 27 2 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 This trap is sent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range transceiverddmiEventClear ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when all device operating parameters return to the normal operating range Table 129 AAA Traps OPTION authentication OBJECT LABEL authenticationFailure OBJECT ID 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 DESCRIPTION This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventO n ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADI USNotReachableEventO n ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server RADI USNotReachableEventCl ear ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61
122. 27 2 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 129 AAA Traps continued ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION accounting RADIUSNotReachableEventO ES3500 24 This trap is sent when there is no n 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSNotReachableEventCl ear ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 130 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when a path to a target changes traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81
123. 30 30 3 zl 2 On v 3600 e fo 30 4 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 NN On 3600 C 30 30 6 al 2 On 3600 e o 30 7 a 2 On y 3600 e 30 8 2 On v 3600 6 ho 30 9 Fl 2 On 3600 60 30 30 V A B hae a Be o Men n Y 0 6 5 3 Enabling Guest VLAN 1 Click the Guest Vlan link in the 802 1x screen ES3500 Series User s Guide 71 Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select Active and enter the guest VLAN ID 200 in this example on ports 1 2 and 3 The Switch puts unauthenticated clients in the specified guest VLAN Set Host mode to Multi Secure to have the Switch authenticate each client that connects to one of these ports and specify the maximum number of clients that the Switch will authenticate on each of these port 5 in this example Click Apply TT 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num al Mult Host Multi Secure 2 Multi Secure 3 Multi Secure 4 C Y Muli Host 1 5 a 1 Mult Host 1 6 O 1 Mult Host 1 7 a 1 Multi Host v 1 8 O 1 Multi Host 1 e Multi Ho Vj 1 3 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently Clients that attach to port 1 2 or 3 and fail to authenticate with the RADIUS server now should be in VLAN 200 and can access the Internet but cannot communicate with devices in VLAN 1 6 6 How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN You want to
124. 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level om Level6 6 y Level5 5m Level4 4 v Level3 379 Level2 lx Level1 0 v Level0 2 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 10 or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 99 for more information Smart Isolation Select Active to enable smart isolation on the Switch The designated port s then becomes the isolated port Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other Note To use smart isolation you should have configured 802 1Q VLAN port isolation or private VLAN and M RSTP on the Switch Smart isolation does not work with MSTP and or port based VLAN MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address learning to Learning occur on a port the port must be active ES3500 Series User s Guide IN Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 15 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table befo
125. 3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 26 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ES3500 Series User s Guide EJ Chapter 26 IP Source Guard ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding Figure 118 P Source Guard Static Binding IP Source Guard EE NEN IPSG MAC Address H IP Address VLAN Port C any Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete The following table describes the labels in this
126. Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Incoming Portisolation v Setting Wizard clo lmierjojolo efoleala a 2 a S e s 8 8 8 S S S B 3 DODOO o 000 0 OD0D00 n 0 0000000000 5 DODOO o 000 000000 n 0000000000 LDEDBBEEoasuoboagdgBuaco oaoocooDLDDLDDLDED s coa 00000890000 0 0 9 0 0000000000000 9005000000900 0 10000001 1401000 mm 0005000000000 00 0 1000000 0 an r000 s 0000000000 00 0 000000 ano0 r000 s 0005000000900 0 10000010001000 s DOORS 9000 000000 00 on a000 CO d o 8 ODOO o 0 00 000000 000 n00 oa a nam O00DO 0 000 000000 000000000000 DOGO o 9 00 000000 2 a o 0 r00000 n ono m 9000000000 1 0 0 020 0000000000000 s 00000000000 o 00 0OOODO0DD o 0000000 9000000000 0 0 s 0 000000 0 0000000 s po000000000 0 se 0 0 000000 0 0000000 s 0000000000 gt 00 0 0O000po0 0000000 Bgggaaosaoaosguggmgoaoasoogpggggasss BDipgmgoaaosopuppmsoasaooppppaasgs DODBOD o os 0 00000800 00 0000000000 DODOD os oo 0000000 000000000000 OODOD e c a o oBIEICIDE o o o c aEIBIEIEIES o c o ej nouuospidEBgEmBDaoooopiJiBdbE a oooopEBE s 0008000000 0 00 0 0000000000000 1808004000000 00 00 0000000000000 000004000000 o 0 0 0000000 0000000 8000000000 9 00 0 0000000 0000000 laj miw ojojrjeja 8 3 9 2X 28 8 5 38 9 8 8 R X S S R S B 1 1 1313 134 1 26 17 3 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 2 1 DoaBBaaseogaaggggidug ssomuaoaoaopDBADEEBdEgaaoosg 9 10 11 12 13 4 15
127. Agent Information Information 192 168 1 100 Status 0 0 0 0 0000 v Option 82 O ES3500 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP 37 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 91 for information on how to set up management IP addresses for VLANs Figure 169 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN D VLAN Setting g Status VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information C Option 82 Information C ES3500 Add Cancel Clear Type DHCP Status Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 P Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP re
128. Agent on the Switch A to pass a subscriber s information to a PPPoE server S There is another switch B between switch A and server S ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Switch B is connected to switch A In this way PPPoE server S can identify subscriber C and may apply different settings to it Port 5 Untrusted Cu Sa S Port 12 Trusted Port 11 Trusted Port 12 Trusted Note For related information about PPPoE IA see Section 31 3 on page 252 The settings in this tutorial are as follows Table 10 Settings in this Tutorial SWITCH PORT CONNECTED VLAN CIRCUIT ID REMOTE ID PPPOE IA PORT TRUSTED A Port 5 to C 1 userC 00134900000A Untrusted Port 12 to B 1 N A N A Trusted B Port 11 to A 1 N A N A Trusted Port 12 to S 1 N A N A Trusted 6 3 1 Configuring Switch A 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply Intermediate Agent Port access node identifier ES3500 circuit id Active identifier string option spv v delimiter v Cancel VLAN PPPoE Click Port on the top of the screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select Untrusted for port 5 and enter userC as Circuit id and 001349000004 as Remote id Select Trusted for port 12 and then leave the other fields empty Click Apply VLAN Circ
129. Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is second listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 40 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Las
130. CP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 44 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 149 for more SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 45 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Group Enabled ID Ports T1 123 T2 45 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 Link Aggregation Status Synchronized Ports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Aggregator ID Link Aggregation Setting Criteria Status src dst mac Static src dst mac LACP src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Link Aggregation information Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group The port
131. Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Click Click Here to go to the Intermediate Agent screen Figure 143 Advanced Application gt PPPoE Intermediate Agent a adl Intermediate Agent Click here 31 3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 252 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 144 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent ED Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE Active access node identifier circuit id Active oO identifier string option spy Y delimiter v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch access node identifier Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent Hyphens and spaces are also allowed The default is the Switch s host name circuit id Use this section to configure the Circuit 1D field in the PADI and PADR packets The Circuit ID you configure for a
132. Control 39 6 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 185 How SSH Works Internet N Y 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server ES3500 Series User s Guide 307 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 7 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 39 7 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH
133. EE and there is no traffic the port enters Low Power Idle LPI mode LPI mode turns off some functions of the physical layer becomes quiet to save power Periodically the port transmits a REFRESH signal to allow the link partner keep the link alive When there is traffic to be sent a WAKE signal is sent to the link partner to return the link to active mode Auto Power Down Auto Power Down turns off almost all functions of the port s physical layer functions when the link is down so the port only uses power to check for a link up pulse from the link partner After the link up pulse is detected the port wakes up from Auto Power Down and operates normally Short Reach Traditional Ethernet transmits all data with enough power to reach the maximum cable length Shorter cables lose less power so Short Reach saves power by adjusting the transmit power of each port according to the length of cable attached to that port Note The ES3500 8PD supports Green Ethernet completely Note The ES3500 24 only supports EEE ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Green Ethernet 34 2 Configuring Green Ethernet Click Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 154 Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet ED Green Ethernet g EEE Port EEE Auto Power Down O ON o 0 amp WN A o Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this
134. ESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them ES3500 Series User s Guide 197 Chapter 24 Multicast Table 70 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set
135. Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch How to Set Up a Guest VLAN How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN 6 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN 100 Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s port which is not in VLAN 100 M TE T 4 VLAN 100 E l TE o ECEB EA i Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 26 5 on page 223 The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table 9 Settings in this Tutorial Host CONNECTED VLAN PVID TRUSTED SPORT DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 1 and 100 100 No DHCP Client C 7 1 and 100 100 No 1 Access the Switch through http 192 168 1 1 Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and password default 1234 ES3500 Series User s Guide 52 Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add EOL VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal M TxTagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden
136. F ResCon me 290 ES3500 Series User s Guide EM Table of Contents Chapter 39 A ip M ee eee emer 292 39 1 Access Control USAR cmt HR 292 25 2 The Access Control Maln DGIE csi 292 0 AOS ad A a T 292 adsl NRP Ena Tu cU 293 2g SUBDSHeOd MIES cara 294 DEG ONE SOS pasaria don dotato eraat Das ftat erent nt uc oU mrt 294 3334 COMU SMIIP ee 301 28 3 5 Caniquiina SNMP Tap DEOUE eri a 302 28 565 Ganfigurmag SMP USEF unico 303 39 Seta WP Loon err e n cdaniescuese hepa deadanstninatehie ae eee AREE 305 EET CILE 117 eR np NETTE auld dole wisn ETE CRT 306 DEO Hon AA o PE IU Per OB npe i tmU bouts bett iR eredghs 307 29 7 SSH Implementation on The SICA uus aec er kk rec ik rh x CREE E Fa EE ER cdd 308 28 7 1 Regurements or SI SSH cr A bio 308 29 9 tod OTF TIPS donan 308 A TTES ESAS A Ad A A RR 309 38 9 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ac cccscccsecnesasaseaesnssdeneennensseeenenessdeneeeresianneaenedsans 309 39 9 2 Mozilla Firefox Warning IMEssages sricicr eiii 312 EE REMIS MAN SS ua can ah Sus ana o T 313 28 10 Service Port Access Onil ia 314 OCT Remate Mangone c 315 Chapter 40 1 2 1 317 MEE pic roe D 317 Chapter 41 SyS e qud dam um i Edi at NM MEE eui pM UM MM bM aa 318 NAVE BRA an HEY 318 FLACO SA ao oda oia odo 319 di3 Syslog Serer BED
137. HP supports Power over Ethernet Note The ES3500 8PD supports Green Ethernet completely The ES3500 24 only supports EEE ES3500 Series User s Guide 332 Chapter 45 Configure Clone Figure 207 Management gt Configure Clone re Uione Source Port Port Feafyes Basic Setting Advanced Application Destination Active Name Speed Duplex Flow Control E Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control 7 VLAN Stacking E Port Security E Broadcast Storm Control o ES E3 3 ja a E Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard 7 ARP Inspection E DHCP Snooping 7 VLAN Mapping Es F3 9 3 Ex Exp E39 3 F3 3 Sl U wer 2 Protocol Tun IE PPPoE E CPUProtection F Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol E Power over Ethernet ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 45 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 148 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which Port are going to have the same attributes as the
138. ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 47 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a
139. ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES3500 Series User s Guide 27 Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 27 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows y
140. Index Active Name VLAN Delete 3 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently Ports 2 3 and 4 in this VLAN will be added to the isolated port list automatically and cannot send traffic to each other From port 2 3 or 4 you should be able to access the device that attaches to port 25 such as a server or default gateway ES3500 Series User s Guide PART II echnical Refer Y System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 7 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Note Different models have different numbers of ports so these screens may show a different number of ports from the model you re using Figure 28 Status D Port Status g Pot Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s UpTime E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 de Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down ST
141. Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts 0 RxPkts 0 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 TX Packet Unicast 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 RX Packet Unicast 0 Multicast 0 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 Distribution 64 0 65 to 127 0 128 to 255 0 256 to 511 0 512 to 1023 0 1024 to 1518 0 Giant 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 12 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link For Ethernet ports this field displays the speed 10M for 10Mbps or 100M for 100Mbps and duplex F for full duplex or H for half settings For dual personality interfaces with the RJ 45 port active this field displays the speed 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps duplex F for full duplex or H for half and media type Copper settings For dual personality interfaces with the SFP port active this field displays the speed 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps duplex F for full duplex or H for half and media type Copper or Fiber settings This field displays Down if the po
142. N through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 124 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration To configure MSTP ports click Port in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP screen Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port QE MSTP Port Configuration d MSTP Port Edge E O 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Applicatio
143. Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this profile This is for identification only Green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority Yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority Red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Add Click Add to insert a new DSCP profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Profile Name This field displays the name of the DSCP profile Click the name to edit the profile settings ES3500 Series User s Guide 275 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Table 116 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker gt DSCP Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Green This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority in this profile Yellow This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority in this profile Red This field displays the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority in this profile Delete Profile Select the profile s that yo
144. OP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 g Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Any O Port ES3500 Series User s Guide 79 Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 29 on page 81 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link For Ethernet ports this field displays the speed 10M for 10Mbps or 100M for 100Mbps and duplex F for full duplex or H for half settings For dual personality interfaces with the RJ 45 port active this field displays the speed 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps duplex F for full duplex or H for half and media type Copper settings For dual personality interfaces with the SFP port active this field displays the speed 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps duplex F for full duplex or H for half and media type Copper or Fiber settings This field displays Down if the port
145. Protocol Table 38 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance e Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LA
146. RSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A Figure 57 MRSTP Network Example To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only 13 1 5 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 15 is backwards compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 5 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and bloc
147. Reauth period Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs O On 1 O 2 On 3600 60 30 30 2 2 On y 3600 60 30 30 3 O 2 On y 3600 60 30 30 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 O 2 On 3600 60 30 30 6 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 O 2 On y 3600 60 30 30 8 O 2 On y 3600 60 30 30 Cea A B A l ie ee wr ue 27 al 2 On Y 3600 60 30 30 28 O 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Max Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client s before sending unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN This is set to 2 by default That is the Switch attempts to auth
148. Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 31 Basic Setting gt General Setup a XCNSokEng a System Name Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 Current Time New Time hh mm ss Current Date hozo for lor New Date yyyy mm dd hozo TN TN Time Zone UTC ioe Daylight Saving Time m Start Date End Date of January It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable or January Y at 0 00 gt z 0 00 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them
149. Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Chapter 25 AAA Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified 25 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS 1P Address 25 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS 1P Address 25 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 25 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting
150. T use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately E ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix B Legal InformationSafety Warnings ENGLISH DEUTSCH ESPA OL Green Product Declaration Rous RoHS Directive 2002 95 EC VERIFIED WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 2008 34 EC Ea 2 Declaration Signature Cre Huay Name Title Raymond Huang Quality 8 Customer Service Division Assistant VP Date yyyy mm dd 2011 1 24 Green Product Declaration nous RoHS Directive 2002 95 EC VERIFIED WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 2008 34 EC i 2 Unterschrift des Erkl renden
151. TTE 17 Chapter 1 Getting lo Know Your SWIEB iiia irc rr KE RR MR ii RMKIM TURON I QU pMd A 19 A ERE uate A oce e Pace b eee uU uli kar cmo eas oem E ode bs Facts Cue cu T 19 UNN E eese ic TET 19 loe Bu E E usce eise t PX ree E PE De po DV BRE RR EY leo peer TORRE PHI Dee PET eter eer rr ret 20 121 3 High Performance Switehing EXsmbplp ugue eina ra eet c rete n etes 20 1 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application EXSmplaB conc bocca danken dnd 21 AR Perd MU 22 12 Ways to Manage dtes SUI ia 22 1 9 Goog Habits for Managing Tie SMICO sons barda 23 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection cccononccccononanccnnananaconanananonanananocona nano nona naar nananananinanas 25 XM euo 1110 dao 25 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure aut a 25 Zo pps SICA ana MASK e 25 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements eese 26 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch sssssssseeeeere 26 2 3 9 Mauntnd the Sic ona Raok aaa 27 Chapter 3 Hardware DIA dies dio acido 28 Sa Front and Bear Pamesa 28 A em ee PE NCE PRTC Tats nmE sree I UII EL 30 Sola ENEMEF OE iaa ii ee 30 3 TEC AS aii 31 acd Power Calls traccion 33 P 87 oo Corr PEERS ME 33 Chapter 4 The Web A da enc a R a E AEAN EEN 37 A INTO UCA eri ii a or ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Table of Contents A abs en T Rar pcr heen 37 2 The Web Coni Bcc MES 38 Ana Change YOUR PASS p 43 dd S A Herba P HERUM p b RR E
152. Table 30 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to Address which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column ES3500 Series User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
153. This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted state Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this
154. This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server ifthe TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 74 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS s
155. This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Error Packet Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 12 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows
156. UYOPVUMKIW asii iii etica 250 31 1 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Formal sin 250 akte oO PONUTIAML ito 250 SAPO Sale sn n 251 LE Th PPPOE SN a ill 252 21o PPPOE ii A 252 Sto FEROS IS POPON ii 254 21 2 8 PPPOE A Per Porn Por VLAN a loo 255 313 3 PPPOE LX TOF VLAN st 257 Chapter 32 241 icon na A A A MAN 258 Se GPU Pr SON IA ir heel d ttc ecu abc a en 258 32 2 Error Disable Recovery DOVOIVIEW suso Eten ea 258 scs The Emor Disable SERBIA paa d PER R abies 259 32 4 CPU Protecton AAA MON T 259 32 0 Error Disable Detect COMMUNION ceros iii 260 32 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuration cir ee 261 Chapter 33 Private 263 20 Puyste VLA DIE ota 263 Be DGonngonmg Privats VLAN arica lent o ci d oett pecu bases oct pL ca d 264 Chapter 34 tac gb olio Se 265 341 Green Emnene OVEIVIBN 2aosconuissttebetiius dta A ERES EUER basi du eta uda 265 34 2 COntquilny Creon EMMA ete 266 Chapter 35 SEU ROUND 267 IO AQUI ARS o ad 267 302 Doantigpring Statie POOLIEIVRI csini rete tea tmi dades ipa E eni beer stud tadscanieae EA 268 12 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 36 DINERO O 270 Ew s ip capo n DT ED MR PEE 270 3B 1 1 DSGP and Pal Hop BOISE ases 270 35 012 DIS AMO EXITOS e cabo aa aac dia a 270 36 2 Two Rate Three Color
157. VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 26 7 2 on page 233 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 26 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 126 ARP Inspection Configure Filter Aging Time Filter aging time Log Profile Log buffer size Syslog rate Log interval ARP Inspection Configure Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active 3 300 seconds 32 entries 5 entries n seconds Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection
158. VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 24 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join
159. You could simply restore your last configuration ES3500 Series User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Installation Scenarios The Switch can be placed on a desktop or rack mounted on a standard ElA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation The following table shows how each model can be mounted Table 2 Installation Scenarios MODEL MOUNTING TYPE ES3500 24 19 rack mounted ES3500 24HP 19 rack mounted ES3500 8PD Desktop rack mountable Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure Make sure the Switch is clean and dry Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a s
160. ZyXEL ES3500 Series Intelligent L2 switch Version 4 00 Edition 3 06 2012 Default Login Details LAN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 Copyright O 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE This is a User s Guide for a series of products Not all products support all firmware features Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in your product firmware or your computer operating system Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Related Documentation CLI Reference Guide The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the Web Configurator to configure the Switch Web Configurator Online Help Click the help icon in any screen for help in configuring that screen and supplementary information ES3500 Series User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Usor o GUNO da 17 Gewig To aw Your SWN ia a E a 19 Hardware Installation and COMNIBOIOT Sian A aaa 25 Fiera O ra iria 28 The Web Comguralal sui ii 37 tal Sata AAS estan AAA ph 47 jiu m 52 hoi i i PAM tte 77 siem Slate ana Port Sree cda 79 Basit SSI sra 84 A A 99 slc MAC Foward BEBE aaa tis 116 Sale MUllesSt FOWA SO us aep ket t ug en
161. ackets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 26 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 115 DHCP Snooping Database File Format
162. ackets is exceeded errdisableRecoveryTrap ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 130 4 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 130 4 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 130 4 2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases the action taken on a port such as shutting down the port or discarding packets on the port after the specified recovery interval Table 128 SNMP Interface Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the Ethernet 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 link is up ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the Ethernet 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 link is down ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 lldp LLDPRemoteTopologyChange 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 This trap is sent when the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol remote topology changes ES3500 Series User s Guide 297 Chapter 39 Access Control Table 128 SNMP Interface Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION transceiver ddmi transceiverddmiEventOn ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61
163. ad already expired Unsupported vians This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 26 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN
164. address table until it is cleared If you specify O for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 8 5 on page 89 Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 About Port Security Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this
165. ag all outgoing frames transmitted received Acceptable Frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming Type frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 100 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices The following figure describes VLAN Trunking Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 38 Port VLAN Trunking C E N v v2 Co vi v2 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 39 Switch Setup Select VLAN Ty
166. ager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in the Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Note Only the ES3500 24HP supports fanspeed and poe system traps Figure 181 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group D Irap Group d Trap Destination IP v Type System Interface AMA me IP Switch SNMP Setting Options coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard errdisable poe linkup linkdown lldp transceiver ddm authentication accounting ping traceroute stp mactable rmon cfm Apply i Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen
167. ame VID Multicast Setting C auto C fixed Apply Cancel po m Add Cancel Clear Name VID Delete Cancel Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to five VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the
168. aning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 9 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register an
169. apter 37 on page 278 26 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings 26 1 2 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 116 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things ES3500 Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 26 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP pack
170. arate the identifier string slot ID port number and or VLAN ID from each other You can use a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Table 104 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 1 PPPOE lA Per Port Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per port basis Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch and there are no trusted ports Click the Port link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 145 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port With HE VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted 1 Untrusted 2 Untrusted 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted 5 Untrusted 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted 8 Untrusted 9 Untrusted 10 Untrusted gt
171. are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 14 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time differe
172. arried in the packets from the subscribers SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 99 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule ES3500 Series User s Guide 185 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule CVID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delet
173. atabase it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 26 4 on page 221 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port Figure 121 DHCP Snooping Port Configure E DHCP Snooping Port Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted y 8 Untrusted_y Configure Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port
174. ation gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Host mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port using a hub Select Multi Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port If the first user enters the correct credential any other users are allowed to access the port without authentication If the first user fails to enter the correct credential they are all put in the guest VLAN Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again Select Multi Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port Multi Secure If you set Host mode to Multi Secure specify the maximum number of users between Num 1 and 5 that the Switch will authenticate on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 85 Advanced Application gt Port Authenticatio
175. be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by the Service Provider s SP VLAN ID VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 10 consists of the following three fields Table 60 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 10 tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPI D Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag f the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPI D tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure f the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example fi
176. be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator Screens Type This field displays 10 100M for Fast Ethernet connections and 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 17 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Gigabit connections only The dual personality interfaces with the RJ 45 port active allow 10 100 1000 Mbps speeds to be selected The dual personality interfaces with the SFP port active allow 100 1000 Mbps speeds to be selected Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When th
177. ber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 102 MVR Network Example A VLAN 1 Multicast VLAN S E A RN 1 VLAN 2 gt M iii TT agg 1 VLAN3 E 24 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 24 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwar
178. ble DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 117 P Source Guard A UNT Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 P Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d
179. bnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch Address that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network addr
180. bytes sec ftp gt ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 144 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 400AABROB2 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management 42 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration to display the next screen Figure 203 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration E Clustering Management Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Iv Name Master VID fi Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 G5 2024 Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen
181. c based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 149 for more information on link aggregation Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting Group ID T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 D Link Aggregation Setting g Active Y Y Port Nn o Qn amp amp WN Status LACP Criteria src dstmac src ip src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac Group T1 T1 H T2 T2 im None m lt rac None ew The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Setting This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Group
182. can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 37 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN 37 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 165 IP Application gt DHCP Status a undis Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None ES3500 Series User s Guide 278 Chapter 37 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 119 IP Application gt DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID or multiple VLAN IDs if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s
183. cast Forward Setup A ane ne ee 118 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding OVerio W socie 118 11 2 Configuring Statie Multicast Forwarding iris ii 119 Chapter 12 dli 122 t2 Congue a Fermo RUE Ne OE inh Ganmia dehy dauebaiyceantsts 122 Chapter 13 uunl gu A A ii 124 130 SIPIHSTP USE eto ERE ence Po coe oaR a dea bid nn ER Betas dU eret i isddE 124 19 10 STIP TREO rc DR ER Gurt Sa a AAE ed ul Au Kirk aa 124 TO PEN STEP PERI Ad 125 TERES POEL SIRS iere poU end sn Tn 125 125 LE PORUM PP Laus sesandur ezboo dpt aac Ddass A Leur dx aoa lx Cie iain er a cii ddl EU 126 19 1 5 Multiple STP ata aa 126 12 2 Spanning Tres Protocol Status SOPBOIT nit it 129 15 2 Spamming Tree Config sERGUE seriada ita 129 134 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ici iio 130 19 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol SAWS inicia kaa 132 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol oooococonnccc nnccccnancciconocananancnnancnnnnanncnnns 133 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status essere 134 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol omcoccccccinnncccnnncccnnncccnnancnnano nan nnnn cana ener 136 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration esses 139 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status ooooccccnnnccinocacincnnnnnancconanononnnncnnnne nc entm nnne nnn 140 Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control
184. cation gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 99 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 43 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting A REDEE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame
185. cceeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful
186. ccess Control 39 9 2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a This Connection is Untrusted screen may display If that is the case click Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception button Figure 191 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox 2 Untrusted Connection Mozilla Firefox File Edit view History Bookmarks Tools Help Cc x amp https 192 168 1 1 LA Most Visited i3 Getting Started A Latest Headlines d Untrusted Connection B Google is secure This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to 192 168 1 1 but we can t confirm that your connection Normally when you try to connect securely sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place However this site s identity can t be verified What Should Do If you usually connect to this site without problems this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site and you shouldn t continue Get me out of here Technical Details Understand the Risks If you understand what s going on you can tell Firefox to start trusting this site s identification E ven if you trust the site this error could mean that someone is tampering with your connection Don t add an exception unless you know there s a good reason why this site doesn t use trusted identification Add Exception b ES3500 Se
187. ce If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 44 ARP Table 44 2 The ARP Table Screen Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view P to MAC address mapping s and remove specific dynamic ARP entries Figure 206 Management gt ARP Table ENSURE Condition O IP Address 0 0 0 0 O Port Index IP Address MAC Address VID Port Type 1 172 16 13 10 00 21 85 0c 44 4b 1 24 dynamic 2 17216 13 255 fF TE fCff fE TT 1 CPU static 3 192 168 1 255 PRPC 1 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 147 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP en
188. ch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 37 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in some cases are necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 38 8 on page 289 SNMP The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager See Section 39 3 on page 292 Es ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Cluster Management Cluster Management allows you to manage multiple switches through one switch called the cluster manager See Chapter 42 on page 321 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch
189. ch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a specific port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE 31 3 3 PPPOE lA for VLAN Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the Switch appends the Circuit ID and or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 147 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN Nu Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No O O 123 No O O 124
190. ch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off Link Aggregation Disabled ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 2 2 Auto crossover All ports are auto crossover that is auto MDIX ports Media Dependent Interface Crossover so you may use either a straight through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port connections Auto crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover or straight ports so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches hubs 3 1 3 Transceiver Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers or 1000 Mbps Small Form factor Pluggable SFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s I NF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details
191. changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh E ES3500 Series User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm Contro Active Port a A Broadcast pkt s TTT OO EISE IET EI 0 0l Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s OO ig B iE BI EB EO Apply E EESERSDE 050 01 El TTT TTT O ancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active
192. client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 39 8 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Swi
193. co Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 137 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario Service Provider s Network In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 138 L2PT Network Example Service Provider s Network 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 138 on page 243 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the
194. ctivate authorization and configure accounting settings Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 111 Advanced Application gt AAA x RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 25 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 203 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25 3 on page 211 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADI the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 112 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup US Server Setup link in D RADIUS Server Setup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 fisi2 C 2 0 0 0 0 1812 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 O 2 0 0 0 0 fi 813 rH Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field only applies if you configure multipl
195. current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes The Port Setup screen allows you to enable or disable a port on the Switch and configure the port settings such as the speed and duplex mode 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature and voltage in this screen Figure 30 Basic Setting gt System Info a JE Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Temperature C BOARD MAC PHY FAN Speed RPM FAN1 FAN2 Voltage V 1 05VIN 12VIN 3 3VIN System Name Product Model ZyNOS F W Version Ethernet Address Current 34 0 37 0 32 0 Current 3663 3706 Current 1 048 12 281 3 308 MAX 34 0 37 0 32 0 MAX 9262 9391 MAX 1 048 12 281 3 308 MIN 29 0 31 0 29 0 MIN 3638 3686 MIN 1 048 12 218 3 291 ES3500 ES3500 24HP V4 00 AADE 0 B1 03 08 2012 00 aa bb cc dd ee Threshold 85 0 85 0 85 0 Threshold 500 500 Threshold 6 10 1 6 Status Normal Normal Normal Status Normal Normal Status Normal Normal Normal
196. d Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled e Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dotlx Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switc
197. d again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 24 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen ES3500 Series User s Guide ES Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES3500 Series User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the Switch IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN LL uL a S Internet CAMP S P paro ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link A VLAN Statu S g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of
198. d de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 9 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 20 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t t
199. d types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 24 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide 187 Chapter 24 Multicast 24 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast g
200. damage your device 38 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras 0 transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras 0 Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 124 on page 289 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 38 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files i
201. dde i 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Cancel Clear VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagaing M TxTagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagging Y Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen MEET The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID ho e 102 Change Pages VLAN Search by VID VLAN Port Settin Search Elapsed Time 49 52 07 0 00 15 Previous Next Static VLAN Status Static Static ES3500 Series User s Guide 57 Chapter 6 Tutorials 9 Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory EOR Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP E Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation gt n n an yl n 1 It o O an y O 3 O 1 r A Y L1 C M a Oe ar y ri ri 5 m fo an El D 5 oOo HB an y Apply Cancel 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 2 3 Configu
202. den Iv TxTagging 5 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging B Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 7 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging e e ceo tb mn e D 2 Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete Yes 1 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 23 Advanced Appli
203. ding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 24 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Sw
204. done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address default gateway device the default domain name server and the management VLAN ID The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway next hop for outgoing traffic 8 6 1 Management IP Addresses The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s Note You must configure a VLAN first Figure 33 Basic Setting gt IP Setup A UAT Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management IP DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 192 168 11 IP Subnet Mask 9552552550 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VID 1 Management IP Addresses IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0000 JV VID i Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Basic Setting gt IP Setup
205. dresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All or Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 24 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 106 MVR Configuration Example ARS A News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 d Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR
206. e ES3500 Series User s Guide 171 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 21 1 Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 167 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 21 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 21 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS
207. e subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building ES3500 Series User s Guide 87 Chapter 8 Basic Setting VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 99 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 8 4 1 Smart Isolation To block traffic between two specific ports within the Switch you can use port isolation or private VLAN see Chapter 33 on page 263 for more information However it does not work across multiple switches For example broadcast traffic from isolated ports on a switch say B can be forwarded to all ports on other switches A and C including the isolated ports Isolated ports N Root port 7 Designated port 8 A cN Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other After you enable RSTP MRSTP and smart isolation on the Switch the designated port s will be added to the isolated port list In the following example sw
208. e IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Service Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you can configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data 106 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 44 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames Internet D J 7 R A Untagged Frames 9 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown ES3500 Se
209. e Link Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down 100M F Down Down Down Down Down Down t 2 3 4 5 B E 8 El lo Bile la le le is loo O Any Port State STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP LACP Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled FORWARDING Disabled STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TxPkts RxPkts 0 0 285753 MO A gt Google PELL Status El Logout E Help Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 6 03 46 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 Copyright 1995 2011 by ZyXEL Communicat ns ES Y 39 10 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control to view the screen as shown Figure 194 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control a Service Access Control d Access Control Services Active Service Por
210. e MSTP Status screen see Figure 70 on page 140 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Ma
211. e RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 73 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This
212. e Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode 1EEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Priority Queue Assignment in Table 15 on page 89 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when y
213. e column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 24 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 24 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA website for more information 24 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans an
214. e following table describes the labels in this screen Table 146 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Sort by Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria you specified Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the specified VLAN Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which are forwarded on the specified port Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 43 MAC Table Table 146 Management gt MAC Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer bu
215. e interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 77 Trunking Example Physical Connections ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunk group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this gr
216. e need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 165 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 51 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding ng Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if
217. e non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 2 Guest VLAN When 802 1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports clients that do not have the correct credentials are blocked from using the port s You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN If you enable the guest VLAN 102 in the example on a port 2 in the example the user A in the example that is not IEEE 802 1x capable or fails to enter the correct username and password can still access the port but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN That is unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN such as the Internet The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature Figure 83 Guest VLAN Example SEE O VLAN 100 UN Internet VLAN 102 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port In the Port Authentication gt 802 1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN MITE 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num Mult Host Y 1 1 Multi Host 1 2 1 Multi Host 1 3 O 1
218. e original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide sFlow This chapter shows you how to configure sFlow to have the Switch monitor traffic in a network and send information to an sFlow collector for analysis 30 1 sFlow Overview sFlow RFC 3176 is a standard technology for monitoring switched networks An sFlow agent embedded on a switch or router gets sample data and packet statistics from traffic forwarded through its ports The sFlow agent then creates sFlow data and sends it to an sFlow collector The sFlow collector is a server that collects and analyzes sFlow datagram An sFlow datagram includes packet header input and output interface sampling process parameters and forwarding information sFlow minimizes impact on CPU load of the Switch as it analyzes sample data only sFlow can continuously monitor network traffic and create reports for network performance analysis and troubleshooting For example you can use it to know which IP address or which type of traffic
219. e policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 172 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 172 ES3500 Series User s Guide 167 Chapter 20 Classifier Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Classifier Oca Active Name O Any VLAN Priority 7 O 0 All mi Ethernet Type a Others Hex Layer 2 OA O any MAC Address e O MAC Sou E Any Port Any Destination MAC Address Sr MAC Any DSCP O All M Establish Only IP Protocol Others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 l MI Address Prefix uer Source 9 Any SocketNumber _ IP Address 2 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix Destination O Am Socket Number Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer
220. e port cannot receive power from the Switch PD Priority This field is not available for the Gigabit or mini GBIC ports When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority Select Critical to give the PD connected to this port the highest priority Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are served Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the nonvolatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 97 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note If the priority settings for two or more PoE ports are the same the ports will shut down randomly when the power budget is not enough We strongly recommend you set the priority for each PoE port to make sure the high priority ports get power Note In classification mode up to five ports can be active The ES3500 24HP reserves 36W per port and the total power budget is 180W Select consumption
221. e required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning BEERE i5 E FHXBBU FIERE EEE R HG TECATE TES E FRESIA EE S Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications Go to http www zyxel com Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re
222. ee if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 131 Loop Guard Probe Packet A B Var The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 132 Loop Guard Network Loop ES3500 Series User s Guide 235 Chapter 27 Loop Guard Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 93
223. een Disable The PD connected to this port cannot get power Enable The PD connected to this port can receive power Class This shows the power classification of the PD This is a number from O to 4 where each value represents a range of power W and current mA that the PD requires to function The ranges are as follows Class 0 Default 0 44 to 12 94 Class 1 Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Class 2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Class 3 Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Class 4 Reserved PSEs classify as Class 0 in a switch that supports IEEE 802 3af only Optional 12 95 to 25 50 in a switch that supports IEEE 802 3at PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first Critical has the highest priority High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are served Consuming Power mW This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this port Max Power mW This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port Max Current mA This field displays the maximum amount of current drawn by the PD from the Switch on this port 8 8 1 P
224. en you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over a lower layer rule Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 r Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other comm
225. ending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 36 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 157 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 36 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 158 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic
226. ends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch needs a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 155 Static Routing Overview E gt o ond ES3500 Series User s Guide 267 Chapter 35 Static Route 35 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 156 P Application gt Static Routing Static Routing J Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address SubnetMask Gateway Address Metric Delete 1 Yes Example 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 192 158 1 2 2 C Active 1 in 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Name Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 113 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Routing is always based on network number If Mask you need to specify a route to a single host use a su
227. ent IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 44 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 39 11 on page 315 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 46 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch
228. enticate a client twice If the client does not respond to the first authentication request the Switch tries again If the client still does not respond to the second request the Switch sends the client to the Guest VLAN The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 49 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauth period Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Quiet period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further authentication requests from the connected client after a failed authentication exchange Tx period Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response before re sending an identity request to the client Supp Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response to a challenge request before sending another request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to th
229. er ES3500 Series User s Guide 287 Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 176 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 38 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 177 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this sc
230. er s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 119 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping NP Configure IPS e Database Status Description Status Agent URL Write delay timer 300 seconds Aborttimer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Aborttimer expiry Not Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Last failed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts 0 Startup failures 0 Successful transfers 0 Failed transfers 0 Successful reads 0 Failed reads 0 Successful writes 0 Failed writes 0 Database detail Description Status First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions D Invalid interfaces 0 Parse failures 0 Expired leases 0 Unsupported vlans D Lastignored time None Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans cioioioio The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 223 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP
231. eral Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower ES3500 Series User s Guide EM Chapter 39 Access Control Table 132 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the man
232. eries User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent gt Port screen to display the screen as shown Figure 146 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN TOREN Port Show Port Port Show VLAN Start VID End VID Port 2 VID Circuit id Remote id 10 11 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN s on the port Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below Port This field displays the port number specified above VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Swit
233. erver Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply E DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps k Untrusted y Untrusted f Untrusted Untrusted z Untrusted y TU Untrusted y Untrusted cm Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VID fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and Information fields in the entry See Section 26 5 1 on page 225 DH Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Start VID fioo End VID fi 00 Show VLAN VID Enabled No y Option82 Information O a r r1 100 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not ab
234. erver and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch
235. es Table 115 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Commit Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Select the DSCP profile that you want to apply to packets on this port In a DSCP profile you can specify the DSCP values to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 2 Configuring DSCP Profiles Use this screen to configure DSCP profiles Click the DSCP Profile link in the 2 Rate 3 Color Marker screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 163 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker gt DSCP Profile a ODS NN Two Rate Three Color Marker DSCP Setup DSCP Profile Name Green Yellow Red Default 0 0 0 Ada Cancel Profile Name Green Yellow Red Delete Profile Default 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 116 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker gt DSCP Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile
236. escribes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field ES3500 Series User s Guide 1 73 Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 57 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION General Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Rate Limit You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previ
237. esh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 174 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 91 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete A Yes Test Example O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide 175 Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 20 4 on page 171 Figure 92 Polic
238. esources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example Me VLAN 1 1 1 a ai I 1 Y gt gt i NY o VLAN1 Ea VLAN 2 i e 1 I MIS s E Le IE ONE itm t MEM lt a i a e LEE 1 N SS x H 1 1 1 RR i dad 1 sea eee eee eee eee ee 1 1 5 IPv6 Support IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses At the time of writing the Switch supports the following features Static address assignment and stateless auto configuration Neighbor Discovery Protocol a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network Remote Management using ping SNMP telnet HTTP and FTP services CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions such as ping IPv4 IPv6 dual stack the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time DHCPv6 client and relay Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping and proxy For more information on IPv6 refer to the CLI Reference Guide 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Swit
239. ess of the final destination Address ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 35 Static Route Table 113 P Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of Address your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 36 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently dep
240. ess were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection VLAN Status Figure 124 ARP Inspection VLAN Status ARP Inspection VLAN Status eg Status Enabled VLAN Show VLAN range C Selected VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below range Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VI D and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from
241. et You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 122 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 26 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 26 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 41 on page 318 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 26 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch Configure DHCP snooping See Section 26 1 1 4 on page 217 Note It is recommended you ena
242. et loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 160 TRTCM Color aware Mode 36 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s 272 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 161 IP Application gt DiffServ ICA 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active E Port Active O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O 9 O O a E a PP ATA A m ACT Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 114 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch m Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you
243. ext to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 150 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect Errdisable Detect J Errdisable Cause Active Mode nectrepor Y ARP O inactive port Y BPDU O inactive port v IGMP O inactive pot v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect LABEL DESCRIPTION Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control packet is exceeded and take the action selected below ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable Table 109 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate limit on a port set in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection screen e inactive port The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received e inactive reason The Swi
244. feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Port Security a Port Security g MAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Port Security Active m Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address s Ie tt 1 Vv 0 2 1 Iv 0 3 m v 0 4 2 jo 5 wg e y A fe cadi agr M a eec LM a ecce Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port li
245. figuration Figure 49 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Incoming All connected x Setting Wizard cjo mlr ojolrjeolo alafala s s sfalafajafalala s s a 8 BIBIBIBIDI s gt e 9 S 8 5 8 E 9 gt gt o 5 5 5 5 5 S 5 gt a s BJBJBIBIDI s SBIR m 6 EEIEIEE S m BIBIBIBIBI BIBIBIBIB gt gt o BJBIBIBIB amp amp e e a B B DJ bI ooo a BB m B SPDIbIBIbIBI 9 9 sbIBIBIBlBl s s e 9 sblelbl s BB B B BBJBIBIBIB 9 9 s 6 o BJBJBIBIBJ amp 9 0 er p DJ BJ S 3 63 63 a c 6 CACA e e 6 6 i IBTIBTB S Bp m9 B S 62 63 3 3 E e gt S BIBJBIBIBI 9S e 69 e BJIBTDI BJBJBJBID gt gt gt e CR RRR e 01 e o BTBTBTBIB e SS amp RRs gt gt gt BIBJBIDID b gt 01 e o BTBTBTBID gt gt e 8 8 5 6 5 S 8 5 5 8 5 gt gt e 6 5 5 8 5 5 6 Re gt gt gt BIBIBIBIBI gt gt gt gt BIBIBIDID m RRs gt gt gt e BJBJDJDID gt m ORR o gt e 9 0 1 1 3 4 15 16 7 18 19 20 212 A 0000 8 2 5 5 s s DABA S 6 6 6 S BEE S laijmi r eojojejoajo 22 39 2923 9 28 5 38 3 a 8 a amp 8 8 s 8 B 9 10 11 12 13 M 1 16 17 158 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based port isolated VLAN configuration Figure 50
246. flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply ES3500 Series User s Guide 270 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 158 DiffServ Network P Platinum G Gold S Silver B Bronze 36 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color
247. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Max Age second Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the
248. g this screen afresh 25 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server 210 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 208 Table 76 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Ve
249. gh a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn ES3500 24 This trap is sent when the Switch fails 5 8 61 27 2 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 5 8 72 27 2 2 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 1 5 8 72 27 2 1 5 8 73 27 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 5 8 72 27 2 2 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 127 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION errdisable errdisableDetectTrap ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 130 4 1 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 130 4 1 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 130 4 1 This trap is sent when an error is detected on a port such as a loop occurs or the rate limit for specific control p
250. gt as Sa ct A A ee Se The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them 254 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Table 105 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers fa PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e Ifa PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers e Ifa PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switc
251. gure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen e 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 23 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 61 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Data FCS Untagged Etype Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VID Len Data FCS IEEE 802 10 D y Etype customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPI Priorit VI TPI Priorit VID Len Data FCS Double tagged D y D D y Etype frame Table 62 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Dentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence
252. guring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP OLED hi eee Status Active O Bridge Priority 32768 2 Seconds 20 Seconds rwarding D 15 Seconds Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost O O 1 O v 128 19 2 o v 128 19 3 O v 128 19 4 O v 128 19 5 O v 128 19 6 a v 128 19 m A A E 27 O v 28 4 28 EJ v 128 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Active Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 65 on page 132 Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root
253. h discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a VLAN on a port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 2 PPPOE IA Per Port Per VLAN Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port ES3500 S
254. h sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configurin
255. h the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number ES Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 96 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer sw
256. hapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 4 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it Note Check the power supply requirements shown on the rear panel and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Keep the power supply switch in the OFF position until you come to the procedure for turning on the power Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket of your Switch Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet For models with power adaptors connect the power adaptor that is provided to the Switch and then connect the power adaptor to a power outlet 3 2 LEDs After you connect the power to the Switch view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting Table 4 ES3500 24 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected Off The system is functioning normally 10 100Base TX Ethernet Ports 1 24 Green Blinking The system is transmitt
257. he PD LED is on 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the Switch off and on 5 Disconnect and re connect the power cord to the Switch 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on 1 Turn the Switch off and on 2 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 3 If the problem continues contact the vendor ES3500 Series User s Guide 335 Chapter 46 Troubleshooting One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 2 on page 33 Check the hardware connections See Section 3 1 on page 28 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the Switch off and on Disconnect and re connect the power cord to the Switch If the problem continues contact the vendor A device that you expect to be powered via Ethernet doesn t receive power over Ethernet Make sure the PoE LED for the port supplying power over Ethernet is on Make sure the Switch port has PD selected so it can supply power over Ethernet See Chapter 8 on page 96 Inspect your Ethernet cables for damage Replace any damaged cables Check cable lengths Disconnect the device that you expect to be powered via Ethernet and make sure the Switch has enough remaining power to su
258. he summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping ES3500 Series User s Guide Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cis
259. his chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction The Switch is a layer 2 standalone Ethernet switch There are three models of the Switch Table 1 Switch models and features MODEL DISTINGUISHING FEATURES ES3500 24 24 10 100 Ethernet ports 4 dual personality interfaces 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet or 1000 Mbps Fiber ES3500 24HP 24 10 100 Ethernet ports only these can supply PoE 4 dual personality interfaces 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet or 100 1000 Mbps Fiber ES3500 8PD 8 10 100 Ethernet ports 2 dual personality interfaces 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet or 100 1000 Mbps Fiber Only port 9 can receive power from a PoE switch All 10 ports support Green Ethernet to reduce switch port power consumption Dual personality interfaces comprise one RJ 45 port and one mini GBIC slot with either a port or a slot active at a time With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers direct
260. his field displays the IP address IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 16 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 34 Basic Setting gt Port Setup a ETE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must
261. his is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 149 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet
262. his is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index VID This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 2 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 99 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail A RIELES VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 8 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 ElapsedTime Status Eles rio e Pis 95 ss 19 24 23 25 ios ulo ju supasg eo isx sa s u Sx 3u 1 3 22 07 Static ujlujujljuj jujujljuj juj jujuju ju u u The following table
263. his trap is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear ES3500 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 61 27 2 2 ES3500 8PD 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 72 27 2 2 ES3500 24HP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 73 27 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 95 of the MAC table is used ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 131 SNMP Switch Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold cfm dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault 39 3 4 Configuring SNMP Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP to view the screen as shown Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings Figure 180 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP SNMP Access Control Trap Group User General Setting Version v2c M Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username v2c 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 132 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Gen
264. ic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR Note The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control Port CE Bandwidth Control J hh w N on eo o on Active ingress Rate Active Commit Rate i Active Peak Rate dit A Kbps Kbps Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 Kbps 1 bps ps ps 1 Kbps The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control
265. ication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied 18 1 1 IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to an IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password after the client responds to its identity request When the client 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software ES3500 Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 18 Port Authentication provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 79 EEE 802 1x Authentication Process b m New Connection Identity Request Login Credentials Q Authentication Request Challenge Request Challenge Response Access Challenge Access Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the cl
266. ide CLI Reference 2 GVRP 100 105 106 and port assignment 106 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 100 H hardware installation 25 hardware monitor 85 hardware overview 28 hello time 137 hops 137 HTTPS 308 certificates 308 implementation 308 public keys private keys 308 HTTPS example 309 IEEE 802 1p priority 90 IEEE 802 1x activate 160 163 206 reauthentication 161 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 157 IGMP version 187 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 187 IGMP filtering 187 profile 193 profiles 189 IGMP leave timeout fast 190 mormal 190 IGMP snooping 187 MVR 194 IGMP throttling 191 ingress port 115 installation desktop 25 precautions 26 rack mounting 25 transceivers 31 installation scenarios 25 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 introduction 19 IP address 92 IP interface 91 IP setup 91 ES3500 Series User s Guide Index IP source guard 215 ARP inspection 215 217 DHCP snooping 215 static bindings 215 IP subnet mask 92 IPv6 22 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 22 ping 22 L L2PT 242 access port 243 CDP 242 configuration 244 encapsulation 242 LACP 243 MAC address 242 mode 243 overview 242 PAgP 243 point to point 243 STP 242 tunnel port 243 UDLD 243 VTP 242 LACP 149 245 system priority 154 timeout 155 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT LEDs 33 limit MAC address learning 166 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 149 link aggregation 149 dynamic 149 ID information 150
267. ient for login credentials The login credentials are based ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication on the source MAC address of the client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 80 MAC Authentication Process lt _ a New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA gt Radius Server Setup screen To activate a port authentication method click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel Select a port authentication method in the screen that appears Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Port Authentication 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x A XSAEEENEP Port Authentication Guest Vian Active Port Active Max Req Reauth
268. igured to the following parameters VT100 Terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Ethernet Ports The Switch has 10 100 Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 10 100 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable The Switch has several dual personality interfaces see Figure 9 on page 28 and Figure 13 on page 29 each of which consists of an RJ 45 Ethernet port and SFP slot pair The Switch activates one connection of each RJ 45 and SFP slot pair The SFP slots have priority over the RJ 45 ports This means that if an RJ 45 port and the corresponding SFP slot are connected at the same time the RJ 45 port will be disabled When auto negotiation is turned on a Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Swit
269. in the sFlow screen to display the screen as shown You can configure up to four sFlow collectors in this screen You may want to configure more than one collector if the traffic load to be monitored is more than one collector can manage Figure 142 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector Ei Port Collector Collector Address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 6343 Index Collector Address UDP Port Delete 1 1 2 3 4 6343 O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port Enter a UDP port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector If you change the port here make sure you change it on the collector too The default port is 6343 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 248 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow Table 98 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of this e
270. ing receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network on The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down Mini GBIC Slots LNK Green On The link to this port is up Off The link to this port is down ACT Green Blinking This port is receiving or transmitting data 1000Base T Ethernet Ports in Dual personality Interface ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 4 ES3500 24 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps or a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Gigabit port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The Gigabit port is negotiating in half duplex mode Table 5 ES3500 24HP LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests
271. is not connected to any device State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 29 Status gt Port Details Port Details J Port Status Port Info Port NO 1 Name
272. it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide 117 Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast
273. itch A is the root bridge Switch B s root port 7 connects to switch A and switch B s designated port 8 connects to switch C Traffic from isolated ports on switch B can only be sent through non isolated port 1 or root port 7 to switch A This prevents isolated ports on switch B sending traffic through designated port 8 to switch C Traffic received on designated port 8 from switch C will not be forwarded to any other isolated ports on switch B Before Smart isolation Isolated ports 2 6 Root port 7 Designated port 8 After Smart Isolation Isolated ports 2 6 8 Root port 7 Designated port 8 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting You should enable RSTP or MRSTP before you can use smart isolation on the Switch If the network topology changes the Switch automatically updates the isolated port list with the latest designated port information Note The uplink port connected to the Internet should be the root port Otherwise with smart isolation enabled the isolated ports cannot access the Internet 8 5 Switch Setup Click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 32 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Switch Setup VLAN Type Port Based Smart Isolation Active MAC Address Learning Aging Time
274. itch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 103 MVR Multicast Television Example gt e x VLAN1 Multicast VLAN S a c j gt N i ile IM i A F pa 4 eee ee mo m mom 24 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 104 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Port NON ROC NU VLAN Active Au ENSE Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority lo y Mode Dynamic C Compatible Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None y C aa a 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Ho Ho He Ho neno o AAA DAAA Add Cancel Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 70 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR 802 1p Priority LABEL D
275. itches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to th
276. k the redundant link Figure 58 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 59 MSTP Network Example 13 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region ES3500 Series User s Guide 127 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 13 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 60
277. key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Select this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to
278. lay the main screen as shown Figure 178 Management gt Access Control a EAT SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Service Access Control Click Here Remote Management Click Here 39 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP I P based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 179 SNMP Management Model Manager Ll Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Example
279. le to get an IP address To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown IP Source Guard Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h17m 0s dhcp snooping 100 You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 and gateway information to DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Eu 101 DHCP Se rver 192 168 2 3 Port 2 PVID 102 172 16 1 18
280. lick Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is second listening to learning to forwarding See Section 13 1 3 on page 125 for information on port states Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Times Time Since Last This is the time since the spa
281. link to a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down PD Amber On This port is receiving power over Ethernet port 9 Off This port is not receiving power over Ethernet ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES3500 Series User s Guide The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Firefox 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the
282. ly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide 19 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application die Internet gt At Sales ah 7 a Y mmmmmmmm mmm ase eee eee eee eee eee o mmm mmm mm 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Switching to higher s
283. mber in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 26 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN
284. ment Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS Server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the TACACS Server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user e Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Metho
285. n gt MAC Authentication a MAC Authentication 3 Port Authentication Active O Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout lo Port Active NO oh 2 WN o 0 0 o0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC
286. n gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide EJ Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Sec
287. n Assistant VP Datum jjjj mm dd 2011 1 24 SVENSKA Milj deklaration RoHS Direktiv 2002 95 EC Mus VERIFIED WEEE Direktiv 2002 96 EC WEEE hantering av elektriskt och elektroniskt avfall 2008 34 EC E a 24 Deklaration undertecknad av Cae Huay Namn Titel Raymond Huang Quality 8 Customer Service Division Assistant VP Datum aaaa mm dd 2011 1 24 ES3500 Series User s Guide Appendix B Legal InformationSafety Warnings ES3500 Series User s Guide Index Numbers 802 1P priority 94 802 3az 265 A access control limitations 292 login account 305 remote management 315 service port 314 SNMP 292 accounting setup 208 address learning MAC 107 110 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 330 332 334 administrator password 306 age 137 aggregator ID 152 154 aging time 90 applications backbone 19 bridging 20 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 21 switched workgroup 20 ARP how it works 330 table 331 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 330 ARP inspection 215 217 and MAC filter 218 configuring 218 syslog messages 218 trusted ports 218 authentication and RADIUS 203 setup 208 authorization privilege levels 210 Index setup 208 auto crossover 31 automatic VLAN registration 100 back up configuration file 288 basic settings 84 basic setup tutorial 52 binding 215 binding table 215 building 215 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 125 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 125
288. n either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 38 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately ES3500 Series User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 39 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different user names and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 125 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 39 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to disp
289. n to create SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups An SNMP user is an SNMP manager Figure 182 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User User Information SNMP Setting Username Security Leve noauth Authentication MD5 v Password Privacy DES v Password Group admin v Ada Cancel Clear Index Username SecurityLevel Authentication Privacy Group Delete 3 admin noauth MD5 DES admin Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User LABEL DESCRIPTION pact Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to Information create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose e noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest securit
290. nce between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time e
291. ndor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 25 2 5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 208 Table 77 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch Note The bolded values in this table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 25 3
292. nds in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among th
293. next ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 195 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Remote Management Access Control Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 d loooo 0 0 0 0 Y BDO MEA m 2 oooo0 0000 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0000 0 0 0 0 Oo O po O 7 0000 0000 o 8 o lo00 0000 O 9 0000 0 0 0 0 10 O 0000 0000 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 O O 12 loo00 0 00 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 00 0 0 0 0 O 16 E lo000 0 00 0 1 O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if yo
294. nning tree was last reconfigured Change ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information on MRSTP Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP E Multiple Status Tree Active Bridge Priorit Hello Time g For ding D O 32768 v 2 seconds 0 seconds 15 2 o 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 P Active Edge Priorit Path Cos Tree E O O 1w O 128 19 1 e o 128 19 1 7 O 128 1 18 amp O 128 19 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 65 on page 132 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priorit
295. nostic General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Management Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table Maintenance IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Diagnostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Cluster Management Link Aggregation ane Port Authentication ARP example Port Security Access Control 42 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 202 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp ls 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W w 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W W w 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 400AABROB2 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44K
296. ntry Collector This field displays IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port This field displays port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide PPPoE This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 31 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview A PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE IA is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients It helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per port or per port per VLAN basis before forwarding them to the PPPoE server i PPPOE Server PPPOE Client PPPoE IA 31 1 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature Table 99 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format The Tag Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag Len indicates
297. o forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping interval database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 84 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping d
298. o handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 23 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 94 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 SPN 8 z A 37 24 o 2 B 48 24 N aces Mars VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B B 23 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel Port the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can
299. o screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack non desktop models ti QO B a E n Ho Y H a uml as 4 G B o SY Oo a n n a n a n M n EL o n Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack desktop models y n n pese a 3 H O q n C ri YD n n pes is n n s n a E H mMm 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack ES3500 Series User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front and Rear Panels The following figures show the front and rear panels of the Switch Figure 9 ES3500 24 Front Panel LEDs Dual personality Interfaces Ethernet Ports Console Port Figure 10 ES3500 24 Rear Panel AC Power Connection Figure 11 ES3500 24HP Front Panel LEDs Dual personality Interfaces mmy ZyXEL m 2 a 0 2 i 1e 20 n E e 5 55555558585s 88 A 53 S8 h LJ 55 Ethernet Ports Console Port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
300. o the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 22 2 Configuring Queuing 178 Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 93 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method x g d Weight Hybrid SPQ Port Method Qo Q Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Lowest Queue SPQ v None v O sPa i i 1 Ow 1 2 3 l4 5 l6 H a None v 2 1 2 3 14 5 6 7 8 None v 3 Ow 1 2 3 4 s l6 7 lg None v 4 1 2 3 4 5 l6 7 B None x 5 1 2 3 4 5 16 7 a None v 6 O i Pp fp f Js Je P fs None v 7 Ow 1 12 13 4 5 16 17 8 None Apply Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59
301. o the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel
302. oE Setup Use this screen to set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting gt PoE Status screen The following screen opens Figure 37 Basic Setting gt PoE Setup E PoE Setup PoE Status a PoE Mode Classification Consumption Por PD PD Priority ls Critical v 1 y Low v 2 Y Low v 3 Y Low v 4 Y Low v 5 y Low ARUM MM Qo Et cds Low 24 Low Y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Basic Setting gt PoE Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use Classification Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the Max Power mW to each PD according to the power classification of the PD If the total power supply available is not enough to supply all connected PDs then PDs with lower priority do not get power to function Consumption Select this if you want the Switch to manage the total power supply so that each connected PD gets a resource However the power allocated by the Switch may be less than the Max Power mW of the PD PDs with higher priority also get more power than those with lower priority levels Port This is the port index number PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port If left unchecked the PD connected to th
303. off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 41 Syslog 41 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to view the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 198 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup Server Address Log Level Index Active e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active 3 0 0 0 0 Level 0 Add Cancel Clear IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 141 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power
304. ol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 56 on page 170 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Address Prefix Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory wh
305. oming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID ESTA N Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP r Port ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation E E E E opa DB i T 2 r Oo A ri n 3 r bo o far a ri 4 o nh J H ar s r r 5 rH hf H far El r m 6 D bh o far r m Top RO TO A r 8 a bo o far r at A SS SS SS Apply Cancel 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address 4 The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 27 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address a Internet gt e NUERA VLAN 1 QA VLAN2 E Connect your computer to the Switch s port which is not in VLAN 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default management IP address in the address ba
306. on Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 55 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 56 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 170 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier 20 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Figure 89 Classifier Example Neri Active v Name Example O An VLAN O An Priority Ethernet Type Socket Number Layer 2 Destination MAC Address z O MAC O Any DSCP O QAI v O Establish Only P Protocol Others Dec IP Address 0000 TT Address Prefix LE Layer 3 Source 2 a 2 Any Socket Number IP Address 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix Destination O Am V Add Cancel Clear After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy to define action s on the classified traffic flow See Chapter 21 on page 172 for information on configuring a policy rul
307. on on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message SN Oj Ol Af W N rR O Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 41 Syslog 41 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 197 Management gt Syslog e Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active M Logging type Active Facility System Vv local use 0 Interface Vv local use 0 Switch Vv local use 0 AAA Vv local use 0 IP Iv local use 0 y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 140 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility Thelogfacility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned
308. on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Type O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 26 6 2 on page 229 Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 41 on page 318 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval
309. on that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that
310. only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 22 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows 7 Weight 1 x 10 KB If the weight setting is 5 the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as follows 24 x 10KB 160 KB ES3500 Series User s Guide 177 Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves t
311. or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address VID This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 29 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address po
312. ort by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Fast Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In normal leave mode when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a port the Switch waits for IGMP reports after the multicast router sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In fast leave mode right after receiving an IGMP leave message from a host on a port the Switch sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast gro
313. ort SUAS sass a 79 6 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents e AA IN 79 PPO ot E A pad cade du et Ecke Ran Diu 79 pica ccu Pee DEAS cec 81 Chapter 8 DISTIN sic a bail 84 CAES a o qe a o o 84 e A er pe UESTRE 84 e Mena SU A A AA 86 AMO YLANG ci 87 2 1 Smart olaa iii 88 e e e O A S 89 SIP SO em TUE 91 8 6 1 Management IF Addresses css 91 Br PO SUB uri do ia 93 BO POE taa ai 94 BO FUE SSI arar e 96 Chapter 9 VLAN E A E a E E M 99 9 1 Introduction to JEEE 802 10 Tagged VLANS urinarias 99 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames iii 99 9 2 Automatic YLAN Registration sssccisnasa la aaia aa EEEE 100 UR ONIBSP assure ied retry E E 100 EA e T 100 egg pil c NIFT E UU emm 101 SER uim LAN TUDO coi 101 a SUE ULA aaa 101 COT AEAN Tcr decr 102 ceo VEAN ecu E 103 Sog Comge gd Siate VLAN a cde cni dre aap a Mapa usu Ka Ga iaaa 104 domar VLAN duae inc cena 105 fig Subnet Based VLAMS aariin E TANANA 106 9 7 Gonfidodng Subnet Based YLAN asa a e sd 107 9 8 Protocol Based EI caia 109 99 Gonigddng Protocol Based VLAN a 110 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example since 111 91 Portbssed VLAN SGUD ias 112 SLT Conigure a Port based VLAN ca aro a 112 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup 116 VOM SA ia 116 ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 10 2 Configuring Statie MAG Forwarding ssrsi ip Rt ta penis a cR e LR iene 116 Chapter 11 Statie Multi
314. ou are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 PoE Note The following screens are available for the ES3500 24HP model only The ES3500 24HP supports the IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet plus PoE standard The Switch is Power Sourcing Equipment PSE because it provides a source of power via its Ethernet ports and each device that receives power through an Ethernet port is a Powered Device PD ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting In the figure below the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch Aside from minimizing the need for cables and wires PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby electric outlet to power up devices Figure 35 Powered Device Examples You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs Note The PoE devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch click Basic Setting gt PoE Figure 36 Basic Setting gt PoE Status PoE Status g PoE Setup PoE Mode Classification Total Power W 183 0 Consuming Power W 0 0 Allocated Power W 0 0 Remaining Power W 183 0 n Consuming E Max Current Port State Class PD Priority Max Power mW Power mW mA 1 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 2 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 3 Enable 0
315. ou to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 129 Loop Guard vs STP Pee ee Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 130 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to s
316. ou want to configure this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 25 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet ba
317. oup as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 78 Trunking Example Configuration Screen 8 Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T1 v src dstmac T2 src dst mac y T3 src dst mac yj T4 src dstmac v T5 stc dstmac v T sre dstmac y T7 src dstmac x T8 src dst mac Y Port Group 1 None 2 3 4 5 6 None v 7 None v 8 None Nonalet XAMPLE 10 e y Ce ea Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete 156 ES3500 Series User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods 18 1 Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication e EEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 25 1 2 on page 203 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings Note If you enable IEEE 802 1x authent
318. ously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1p priority and send the packet to priority queue to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Then put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value and send the packet to priority queue to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Then put the packets in the designated queue Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Rate Limit Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afr
319. pe e Switch Setup 802 10 VLAN Type C Port Based 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 99 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 40 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index 1 Change Pages O RENE VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 1 VLAN Port Setting po 7 Search Static VLAN Status Static VID Elapsed Time 1 0 52 21 Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN DESCRIPTION Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of Search Results T
320. peed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application Sales Ka seen eee m e m m m mm se ee ee oe ee ee m ut m m m m m m m m m m See ee eee eee ee eee 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 99 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared r
321. port It is recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 124 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information on MRSTP ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 67 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP panning Tree Bridge ree Frotoco ie Tree Protocol MRSTP ly Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001 349000002 Hello Time second 2 z Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change tatus Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Root Our Bridge 0 00 00 The followin
322. port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 149 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active Y System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 T2 Y T3 T4 al T5 T6 HO T7 T8 Port LACP Timeout 30 M seconds 1 30 v seconds 2 30v seconds 3 30 v seconds 4 30 Y seconds 5 30 v seconds 6 30 v seconds 7 30 v seconds 8 30 Y seconds a seemed ge Me M v cmm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Link Agg
323. pping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 134 VLAN mapping example UN Q Service Provider Network ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 135 VLAN Mapping E VLAN Mapping VLAN Mapping Configure Active O Port Active O oin c 0 BONO a 9 HaHaHa EnHn HEHEHEHE EN e Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 LABEL VLAN Mapping DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non
324. pply the device before re connecting it See Chapter 8 on page 94 Increase the priority of the port See Chapter 8 on page 94 A port is cabled correctly but the port status is down 1 Disable Green Ethernet on the port See Chapter 34 on page 266 for details of how to do this If the port comes up then the port at the other end of the link probably doesn t support Green Ethernet If the port comes up then try disabling and re enabling the port again Inspect your Ethernet cables for damage Replace any damaged cables Check cable lengths Check that the device at the other end of the link is powered on ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 46 Troubleshooting 46 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 The default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Use the console port to log in to the Switch 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 44 forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 44 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and
325. quests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays the DHCP mode Relay DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 37 DHCP Table 122 P Application gt DHCP gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 37 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168
326. r WRR Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 179 VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 23 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 10 tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs t
327. r bb abend S A E UR AG RARE NN 118 ilu MR SERT LS TII 122 chup uico Locas 124 Bcc A o Up GF Cae OCoR nonc FG on Canon ee LG Do LC DLE Ln PR e 142 Broadcast Stm ODE iii id iia 145 q PPP T E 147 EE PINION M ETE D DD T EA E T 149 Eo AAA a o O 157 POR SR ii 165 CSS dad 167 POE AUS iaa 172 CULTO MSM ia A a ee 177 MEANS aaa ies 180 Mulas ani 187 A a is 202 PSUS QUE RE UU 215 ENANA rerere rr treet 234 VEAN Ier sa DU UL LS 238 Layer 2 Riccio e 242 Cia NET T TII T EMEN ME 246 PPP t T m IUE 250 cire WW n 258 Eats YLAR ouo dde cH liebe Epod ve sS iil copo a m epu RUE EL Gd dg MER ER KE PRI AUR E wA RUE EESUD NE 263 fares Te Tel i 265 rid eiii OA se AEER IANA a 267 ES3500 Series User s Guide 3 Contents Overview Ao AMM A bead Fata Maan tana aad ce POL as Pv 270 A ia gah ng NE anc deans dain dica De tan ctm ed 278 dicas br e e c 285 A on ade led ub tr nS m ebbe rti ana rp 292 RW ns E T arty rreen rrr reece earner 317 POG IG A danutieacecatne 318 SERIE ie d ni ens un rit ari xs gd ela i N E rss tania ae 321 MAG c aces tutak viadaud Sadao N ee 327 ARP TOE rana age ERUNT pe 330 MN CONE gea a a R reenter entre emcee GARE Fx 332 THOMDIBSIOQWG seri iaa 335 EN ES3500 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents eiie IERI EIL D LE UE 3 Table of DAMAS is 5 Par k Users RC LA
328. r to access the web configurator See Section 4 7 on page 45 for more information Click Basic Setting gt IP Setup in the navigation panel JUECES Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management P DHCP Client Address 2 Static IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway lo 0 0 0 VID 1 Apply Cancel Management IP Addresses 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 2 0 0 0 0 IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway IP Address IP Subnet Mask index VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 6 Inthe VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 7 Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ES3500 Series User s Guide EN Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch How to Use
329. re done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 4 2 Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 97 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ ECC VLAN Stacking Active a Name Port 7 CVID SPVID Priority o Ada Cancel index Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag c
330. re they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed J oin Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch ha
331. reen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 288 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 38 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 38 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 124 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config cfg This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras 0 bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the i Switch ras 0 is image 1
332. regation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Control Protocol Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link aggregation Active System Priority Group ID ports Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 48 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the tim
333. ress learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the management IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed flow control and priority settings for individual Switch ports ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 8 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION PoE This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to supply power over Ethernet Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static Multicast Forwarding This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you
334. resses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Clear Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name Start Address This field displays the descriptive name of the profile This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 24 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscri
335. ries User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Confirm the HTTPS server URL matches Click Confirm Security Exception to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 192 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox Add Security Exception You are about to override how Firefox identifies this site A Legitimate banks stores and other public sites will not ask you to do this Server Location https 192 168 1 1 i Certificate Status This site attempts to identify itself with invalid information Wrong Site Certificate belongs to a different site which could indicate an identity theft Unknown Identity Certificate is not trusted because it hasn t been verified by a recognized authority EXAMPLE Permanently store this exception Confirm Security Exception Cancel 39 9 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar in Internet Explorer 6 or ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Mozilla Firefox or next to the address bar in Internet Explorer 7 or 8 denotes a secure connection Figure 193 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection 2 Web Configurator Mozilla Firefox File Edit view History Bookmarks Tools Help e Q X a EA mos 1192168 1 1 lost Visited Getting Started A Latest Headlines Web Configurator Et Nam
336. ries User s Guide 1 07 Chapter 9 VLAN Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN Figure 45 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN a b z d VLAN Vlan Port Setting Active O DHCP Vlan Override O Apply Active r Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP Override VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Select this to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which y
337. ring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory DHCP Relay Status Active Y Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 2 3 Remote DHCP 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Se 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information v Option 82 Information v ES3500 Apply Cancel 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 6 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect 6 3 How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch You want to configure PPPoE Intermediate
338. roup membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 24 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 24 1 on page 187 for more information on multicasting 188 Figure 98 Advanced Application gt Multicast a OME Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 on page 187 for more information on multicasting Figure 99 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OMS Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Querier O IGMP Snooping Host Timeout Deo 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding Drop Port immed Normal eae Fatime Group Max Group Throttling
339. rt By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce th
340. rt filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Configure the Switch to filter traffic based on the traffic s source destination MAC addresses and or VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Filtering qi Active O Name Discard source Action MAC L EL E E dst VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Discard destination Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Action Select Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Filtering
341. rt is not connected to any device Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast
342. rts Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 17 Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk gro
343. s 5 u Suggested Sites Free Hotmail 4j x Certificate Invalid The security certificate presented by this website has errors Ae y Signin 88 web Configurator x This problem might indicate an attempt to Tc E i dm Pages Safety Tools mum fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage Save M Status El Logout H Help About certificate errors View certificates Port Name Lim Down STOP Disabled RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKBis Up Time 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 es 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Click Install Certificate and follow the on screen instructions to install the certificate in your browser Figure 190 Certificate Internet Explorer 7 or 8 Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to ES3500 0019cb000001 Issued by ES3500 0019cb000001 Yalid from 1970 01 01 to 2030 03 27 Install Certificate I mm ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 A
344. s Default x 8 Kbps Kbps Default Kbps Kbps Default v 10 hos Oi Kbps Default 11 Kbps Kbps Default ae Kbps Kbps Default x 13 1 IK m The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch E Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Servic
345. s User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard LABEL Table 93 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 237 VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 28 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabled the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Gigabit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre configured VLAN ma
346. s eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are
347. s of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 126 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 39 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them ES3500 Series User s Guide 293 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 3
348. s the labels in this screen Table 138 Management gt Diagnostic Ethernet Port Test LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test ES3500 Series User s Guide 317 This chapter explains the syslog screens 41 1 Syslog Overview Syslog The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 139 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error conditi
349. s the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only and Untag Only Type yP Select All to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the sam
350. s to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 on page 28 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 23 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 05 03 02 2011 09 42 05 RAM Size 65536 Kbytes DRAM POST Testing 65536K OK FLASH AMD 128M 1 ZyNOS Version ES3500 24 4 00 AABR O 11 01 2011 14 14 51 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your passwor
351. sabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 20 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configur
352. sare en cn an Sl abla See ana 165 Chapter 20 AAPP PA 167 20017 ADOUBIS DRESS and COS nn 167 202 COMING e CASSIE assi UU LT 167 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration sees 169 204 Is SM EXA rr ar A A AA A A A 171 Chapter 21 A ASP PP 172 FON Polley Aulos I8 c aria ia ii 172 AMAS iio 172 2112 DSOP and ParHop EN ir io 172 elc baii Pollos Rules daa 172 21 3 viewing and Editing Policy Contiqutallg oes ai 175 Mm Nim clue eee eee T D DE 176 Chapter 22 situa c 177 ES3500 Series User s Guide 9 Table of Contents 221 Queuing Method ERASE uri ii 177 2241 oO O SIA se cor sin a RAA Raa 177 22 3 2 Weighted Fail QUEUING ances ciinbuieccis iere ou isthe eee re part ate eevee 177 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR con vaa 178 2272 sese Tu QUE rd a 178 Chapter 23 VLAN E si o 180 2 VLAN SECANO E Mm e 180 ow VLAN ro edm luc cT ri T m TT 180 pae VLAN Stacking POR ROES e 181 edd VEAN Tug FOE ioo Porti ort C Por ncc an da nca aout pa 182 Kurt MN CIacNg dc e T EU UL ces aco EN 182 3 Comunas LAN SIRE copo 183 doak PON eB O MO rr sudo ost abu io aS aad HD GS Ka uM ER ftp aud 184 2952 ClO CMT to 185 Chapter 24 li MN 187 oM Tee icr eR AE RETT 187 243 T a cacumen eb pet enc FrE d lepra unui Ete box pase debe p one Us 187 2412 GMP EII eM 187 24 13 MPA DI tos ls coa 187 24
353. screen Table 112 Advanced Application gt Green Ethernet LABEL DESCRIPTION EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet globally Auto Power Down Select this to activate Auto Power Down globally Short Reach Select this to activate Short Reach globally Port This shows the port on the device EEE Select this to activate Energy Efficient Ethernet on this port Auto Power Down Select this to activate Auto Power Down on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 35 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP Telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch s
354. screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 107 MVR Configuration Example A LD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active iv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging c Cc o Oo 10 c c e EXAMPLE 200 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 108 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration lt pra Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Movie Start Address 230 1 2 50 End Address 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN 200 Name Start Address End Address Delete All r Delete Group News 2241 4 10 224 1 4 50 O Delete Cancel Figure 109 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration 200 WR Multicast YLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MYLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 224 1 4 10 230 1 2 60 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel ES3500 Series User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization
355. scribes the labels in this screen Table 118 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide 277 DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 37 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 37 1 1 DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you
356. se two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply A VLAN J Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuitid Remote id a No y E o 1 Yes vi Apply ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The settings are completed now If you miss some settings above subscriber C could not successfully receive an IP address assigned by the PPPoE Server If this happens make sure you follow the steps exactly in this tutorial 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch This tutorial shows you how to shut down a port when there is a loop occurred or too many ARP requests over 100 packets per second received on a port You also want the Switch to wait for a period of time 10 minutes before resuming the port automatically after the problem s are gone Loop guard and Errdisable features are helpful for this demand Note Refer to Section 27 1 on page 234 and Section 32 4 on page 259 for more information about Loop Guard and Errdisable To configure the settings 1 First click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Select the Active option in the first section to enable loop guard on the Switch Then select the Active option of the first entry port to enable loop guard for all ports Click Apply ESTEE mn amp WN Oo on om ERIS E EK RII E ES3500 Series User s Guide
357. sed VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN For example ports 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and ports 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You can configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port
358. ser account and AAA configuration readonly Members of this group have read rights only meaning the user can collect information from the Switch Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Click on an index number to view more details and edit an existing account Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for Level SNMP communication with this user Authenticati on This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this user Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Table 134 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs Delete Click Delete to remove the selected
359. setup 152 154 status 150 traffic distribution algorithm 151 traffic distribution type 153 lockout 43 log 317 login 37 password 43 login account Administrator 305 non administrator 305 login accounts 305 configuring via web configurator 305 multiple 305 number of 305 login password 306 loop guard 234 how it works 235 port shut down 236 probe packet 235 loop guard vs STP 234 MAC Media Access Control 85 MAC address 85 330 maximum number per port 166 MAC address learning 89 107 110 116 166 specify limit 166 MAC authentication 158 aging time 164 MAC filter and ARP inspection 218 MAC freeze 166 MAC table 327 display criteria 328 how it works 327 sorting criteria 328 transfer type 329 viewing 328 maintenance 285 configuration backup 288 current configuration 285 firmware 287 main screen 285 restoring configuration 288 Management Information Base MIB 293 management port 115 managing the device good habits 23 using FTP See FTP 22 using Telnet See command interface 22 using the command interface See command interface 22 man in the middle attacks 217 max ES3500 Series User s Guide Index age 137 hops 137 MDIX Media Dependent Interface Crossover 31 MIB and SNMP 293 supported MIBs 294 MIB Management Information Base 293 mirroring ports 147 monitor port 147 mounting brackets 26 MST Instance See MSTI 128 MST region 127 MSTI 128 MST ID 128 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
360. specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority over this The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port in the Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent gt Port screen or for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has priority over this That means if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN setting leave the fields here empty and configure circuit id and remote id in the Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN screen Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user defined identifier string and variables specified in the option field to PADI or PADR packets from PPPOE clients If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string using CLI commands on the Switch the Switch will use the string specified in the access node identifier field identifier string Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub option You can enter up to 53 ASCII characters Spaces are allowed option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID sub option The variable options include sp sv pv and spv which indicate combinations of slot port slot VLAN port VLAN and slot port VLAN respectively The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value delimiter Select a delimiter to sep
361. ssign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 31 on page 124 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 124 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 65 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration C
362. st Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device must wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is di
363. st interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 128 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Start VID Apply Configure End VID VLAN VID Enabled No y Apply Cancel Log None y The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN
364. strator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins Reference Guide You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI User Name Password Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 5 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 184 SSH Communication Example SSH Server di Internet AR al ws ma SSH Client ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access
365. switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a
366. syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 26 7 on page 230 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 89 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and
367. t Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Internal Cost Port ID This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance ES3500 Series User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 14 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 14 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traff
368. t Start Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default 3 In the web configurator click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 38 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 38 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 38 Maintenance 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 174 Reboot System Confirmation Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system 2
369. t To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 123 ARP Inspection Status A ORS Sao VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPS Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the of filters Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet ES3500 Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 87 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table I P The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP addr
370. t www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products ES3500 Series User s Guide 347 Appendix B Legal InformationSafety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NO
371. t Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LE Mirroring__ 1 Active O Monitor Port 1 Port Mirrored Direction d 5 Ingress y Ingress y Ingress y Ingress y Ingress y Ingress y Ingress y EEE Ingress E a c AM ss Apply Cancel MEM The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without Port interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Type the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number ES3500 Series User s Guide 147 Chapter 16 Mirroring Table 43 Advanced Application gt Mirroring continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all po
372. t Timeout Telnet Iv 23 SSH 7 l2 FTP 2 ei HTTP Iv o Bo Minutes HTTPS Vv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 136 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 11 Remote Management Click Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management to view the screen as shown
373. t based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 96 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ Port 1 SN Cc C 4 Wi S l e 4 eo 28 D Port based QNO c VLAN Stacking w y E 5 y 2 2 dde 4 El Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 99 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you a
374. t out the port s loop back to the Switch the Switch can shut down the port s automatically After that you need to enable the port s or allow the packets on a port manually via the web configurator or the commands With error disable recovery you can set the disabled port s to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable 32 3 The Error Disable Screen Use this screen to configure error disable related settings Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 148 Advanced Application gt Errdisable OZ CPU protection Click here Errdisable Detect Click here Errdisable Recovery Click here 32 4 CPU Protection Configuration Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets ARP BPDU and or IGMP that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Note After you configure this screen make sure you also enable error detection for the specific control packets in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect screen Figure 149 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection CPU protection _ Errdisable Reason ARP Port Rate Limit pkt s matt OeOpjojyojprcoyoj coli
375. t s in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports The uplink ports 25 to 28 are always in the promiscuous port list A promiscuous port can communicate with any port in the same VLAN An isolated port can communicate with the promiscuous port s only Note You can have up to one private VLAN rule for each VLAN In the following example ports 1 2 3 and 25 belong to VLAN 123 You configure and enable private VLAN for VLAN 123 on the Switch Then ports 1 2 and or 3 cannot send traffic to each other but they all can talk to the uplink port 25 Figure 152 Private VLAN Example VLAN 123 Isolated ports 1 3 Promiscuous port 25 en Note Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with private VLAN enabled Otherwise this VLAN is blocked from the whole network ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 33 Private VLAN 33 2 Configuring Private VLAN Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 153 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN index 1 C a Private VLAN 7 Active Name VLAN ID Add Cancel Clear Active Name VLAN Delete Yes test 123 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 111 Advanced Application gt Private VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box
376. tandard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit ES3500 Series User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 3 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 5 Attaching the Mounting Brackets non desktop models 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the tw
377. tch s WS web server Figure 186 HTTPS Implementation WS ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 39 Access Control Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 39 9 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 39 9 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages 39 9 1 1 Internet Explorer 6 When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 187 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer 6 x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or ee changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority e The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed example Yes No Vie
378. tch drops all the specified control packets on the port rate limitation The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle in every one second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuration Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 151 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery Errdisable Recovery g Errdisable Active o Reason Timer Status Interval loopguard O 300 ARP O 300 BPDU O 300 IGMP C 300 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to turn on the error disable recovery function on the Switch Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what
379. te VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the Switch Green Ethernet This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to reduce port power consumption See Chapter 34 on page 266 for more details IP Application Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and can test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attached to a port You can also
380. that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 31 STP Path Costs umkseero FRCGEMENDED RERQUMENDED ARNE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 STP Path Costs RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED LINK SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the bridge communicates with the root through the root port The root port is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 13 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches
381. the length of Value i1 and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DE9 which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPoE client 31 1 2 Sub Option Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 100 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format User defined String SubOpt Length Value ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Table 101 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub option Format SubOpt Length Value The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option and 2 identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The Switch takes the Circuit ID string you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as the second priority In addition the Switch puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option if you do not specify any user defined string 31 1 2 1 Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port the Switch adds the user defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of
382. the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 201 on page 323 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 42 Cluster Management 42 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 201 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen Status El Logout HB Help Member Menu Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diag
383. tion 13 1 5 on page 126 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status g Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349000002 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4093 MSTI 1 y Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 internal Cost 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our
384. to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADI US are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 75 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch manage
385. tries when you click Flush Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table Select IP Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the specified IP address Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified port Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs Port This field displays the port to which the device connects CPU means this learned IP address is the Switch s management IP address Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES3500 Series User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 45 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Note Only the ES3500 24
386. ts an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or Mode server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 4 on page 188 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 100 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN VLAN Index CE TEMP Snooping VLAN Mode N
387. tton to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries These entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES3500 Series User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 44 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 44 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the devi
388. u wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch End Address The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted SNMP SSH HTTPS computers Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 40 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 196 Management gt Diagnostic System Log IP Ping Ethernet Port Test LS Diagnostic Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Display Clear IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test The following table describe
389. u want to remove Delete Click Delete to remove the selected profile s from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 36 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 117 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 36 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 164 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting A OSCE Setting Diffserv DSCP to 802 1p Mapping 0 0 1 10M 2 0v 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 O0 7 OM sli 9114 phim 11 1 12 14 111 11v 45119 16 2 w 17 2 18 2v 19 2 v 202 21 2w 2 24 23 24 24 3w 25 34 26 3v 27 3v 28 3v 29 3 30 34 31 134 32 4w 33 4v 34 4v 35 4v 36 4v 374v 38 4v 39 4v 40 5w 41 5v 42 5v 43 5v 44 5v 45 5w 48 5v 47 5v 48 6v 49 6v sojex 51 6vw s2 6v s3 l6v s4l6w 55 6 s6 70 577v 587v 597v 60 7 81 7v 627 637v 276 ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 36 Differentiated Services The following table de
390. uitid E Port Port Server Trusted State M Untrusted 1 Untrusted Mi 2 Untsted v 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted tn 6 7 8 Untrusted Y 3 Untrusted UN 10 Untrusted v 13 Untrusted v 14 lUntrusted Untrusted Y luserC 00134900000A Intermediate Agent Remote id Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen Intermediate Agent g Active access node identifier circuit id Active identifier string option delimiter ES3500 spv Port PPPoE ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Enter 1 for both Start VID and End VID since both the Switch and PPPoE server are in VLAN 1 in this example Click Apply DALE Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID 1 End VID 1 VID Enabled Circuitid Remote id No E O O 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPoE server Click Apply A VLAN J Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuitid Remote id No Y HO L1 1 Yes w 6 3 2 Configuring Switch B The example uses another ES3500 24 as switch B ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials
391. up The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 155 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 17 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LA
392. up This helps speed up the leave process This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new GMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Profile Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier The Switch trea
393. uration 44 288 RFC 3164 318 Round Robin Scheduling 178 RSTP 124 ES3500 Series User s Guide Index S safety warnings 348 save configuration 43 286 service access control 314 service port 315 sFlow 246 collector 248 configuration 247 datagram 246 overview 246 poll interval 247 sample rate 247 UDP port 248 sFlow agent 246 sFlow collector 246 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP 292 Small Form factor Pluggable SFP 31 SNMP 292 agent 293 and MIB 293 and security 293 authentication 304 communities 301 management model 293 manager 293 MIB 294 network components 293 object variables 293 protocol operations 293 security 304 setup 301 302 users 303 version 3 293 versions supported 292 SNMP traps 294 setup 302 supported 294 295 298 300 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 124 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 178 SSH encryption methods 308 how it works 307 implementation 308 SSH Secure Shell Secure Shell See SSH 306 SSL Secure Socket Layer 308 standby ports 149 static bindings 215 static MAC address 116 static MAC forwarding 107 110 116 static multicast address 118 static multicast forwarding 118 static routes 269 static trunking example 155 Static VLAN 104 static VLAN control 104 tagging 105 status 79 link aggregation 150 port 79 port details 81 power 85 STP 132 134 140 VLAN 102 STP 124 245 bridge ID 132 135 bridge priority 131 133 configuration 130 133 136 designated bridge 1
394. volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 136 VLAN Mapping Configuration Active Name Port VID Priority Index Active C VLAN Mapping Configure 7 Translated VID Name Port VID VLAN Mapping T Ada Cancel Translated VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 VLAN Mapping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VID field Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Select a priority level from 0 to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Add Click Add to insert the entry in t
395. w Certificate ES3500 Series User s Guide 309 Chapter 39 Access Control 39 9 1 2 Internet Explorer 7 or 8 When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a screen with the message There is a problem with this website s security certificate may display If that is the case click Continue to this website not recommended to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 188 Security Certificate Warning Internet Explorer 7 or 8 9 There is a problem with this website s security certificate The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website s address Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Click here to close this webpage pag x Continue to this website not recommended More information After you log in you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error Click on Certificate Error next to the address bar and click View certificates Figure 189 Certificate Error Internet Explorer 7 or 8 gt Web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ZyXEL Jer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help x Google lv SB search Sy Favorite
396. want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 36 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next ES3500 Series User s Guide 273 Chapter 36 Differentiated Services Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 162 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker 274 LEN 2Rate 3 Color Mare g DSCP Profile Diffserv Active Mode color blind color aware Port Active Commit Rate Peak Rate DSCP i O Kbps Kbps Default 1 Kbps Kbps Default v 2 Kbps Kbps Default w 3 Kbps Kbps Default 4 Kbps Kbps Default 5 Kbps Kbps Default v 6 Kbps Kbps Default x 7 Kbps Kbp
397. witch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration g Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 124 for background information on STP ES3500 Series User s Guide 129 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done confi
398. writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time h
399. x Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between O and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 ES3500 Series User s Guide 137 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree
400. y 1 Untrusted 2 Untrusted 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted 5 Untrusted y 6 Untrusted y 7 Untrusted y us Ec BE A a a Ir ort Confiqure Configure Limit Rate pps Burst interval seconds THT Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit Rate and Burst nterval settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Burst interval Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for seconds each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the bur
401. y the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting informati
402. y Example Classifier s General Rate Limit Bandwidth 10000 Kbps Egress Port 1 Parameters Priority Ov DSCP TOS Ov Forwarding 9 No change Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority 9 No change Setthe packet s 802 1p priority and send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value and send the packet to priority queue Action Diffserv 9 No change Setthe packets TOS field Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing E Send the packetto the egress port EXAMPLE Rate Limit M Enable Ca emn c 176 ES3500 Series User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 22 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 22 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority
403. y learned in the MAC table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 204 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port ES3500 Series User s Guide 327 Chapter 43 MAC Table 43 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 205 Management gt MAC Table A UL Transfer Type Condition C MAC 1 J Sort by mac e all O Static C VID C Port e Dynamic to MAC forwarding O Dynamic to MAC filtering Index 1 on C Ch 2 Wh Search Transfer Cancel MAC Address VID Port Type 00 00 aa 10 01 73 1 27 dynamic 00 00 88 7c 14 80 1 28 dynamic 00 02 83 55 15 8d 1 27 dynamic 00 02 83 57 8a 1c 1 27 dynamic 00 04 80 9b 78 00 1 27 dynamic 00 0d 88 ca af b2 1 27 dynamic D0 0e 7b e4 17 19 1 27 dynamic 00 0f b0 80 87 56 1 27 dynamic Th
404. y level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View based Access Control Model VACM group SNMP managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs Specify in which SNMP group this user is admin Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration including the management of administrator accounts readwrite Members of this group have read and write rights meaning that the user can create and edit the MIBs on the Switch except the u
405. you want to allow to join multicast groups ES3500 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a p

ES3500 Series User's Guide - Server 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents